Você está na página 1de 242

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR DOCUMENT KMP_826

MATERIAL NUMBER
KMP_826

MATERIAL TYPE/COLOR

2.1

BINDER:
2.1.1
Vinyl slant-D ring binder with transparent plastic insert pockets, front, back spine
8.5 X 11 80 lb Grey speckletone. Cover Smooth finish.

2.2

2.3

INTERNAL PAGES
2.2.1

70lb, White Paper, Offset.

2.2.2

Double-sided copy using Xerographic methods from single-sided orginal.

2.2.3

All graphics and drawings will be provided as camera ready copy.

TABS:
2.3.1

1-31 Tabset American Thermoplastics No. SI3INU or equivalent. Tabs 1 thru 21 are used.

2.4

Blank flyleafs to be added, front and back.

COLORS

3.1

BINDER White
3.1.1

Inserts 80 Lb. Hammermill Cover stock, Antique Finish


Color used: Pepper

3.1.2

The inserts to be printed using conventional offset color lithography from provided camera ready
copy/electronic media file.

3.1.3

Colors used on pepper cover stock:


Blue Pantone 300
Orange Pantone 165
Black Black

3.2

INTERNAL PAGES:
Text Black
Pages Black

MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR DOCUMENT KMP_826


4

SIZE/ORIENTATION/NUMBER

4.1

BINDER:
4.1.1

4.2

4.3

8 X 11 Portrait 3 ring slant-D binder 3 ring size

INTERNAL PAGES:
4.2.1

Text Pages 124 Double-sided pages 8 X 11 (248 page faces)

4.2.2

Drawing Pages 102 page faces - single-sided pages 8 X 11, and 11 X 17 folded to 8 X 11

BINDER INSERTS
4.3.1

Front 11 wide x 11 high

4.3.2

Spine 3 wide x 11 high

BINDING

5.1

3-Hole drilled internal pages to match configuration of rings in binder.

CERTIFICATION
Certification is not required; however, a packing list with the following information is required:

MEDRAD Material Number

Purchase Order Number

Quantity Shipped

Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Table of Contents

Preface
Copyright Notice
Trademarks
Patents
Restricted Sale Notice
Applicability
European Council Directive Compliance
Manual Purpose
Safety Notice
Disclaimers
Address/Telephone
Introduction to Warnings and Cautions
Statement of Intended Use
Contraindications
Warnings
Cautions

2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-5

Condensed Operating Guide


Control Panel
ECG/Scope Control Panel

3-1
3-4

Preventive Maintenance
Recommended Preventive Maintenance
Recommended Preventive Maintenance Schedule
Inspection Procedures
Cleaning Procedures
Leakage Check
Ground Continuity Check

4-1
4-2
4-3
4-6
4-7
4-7

Basic Checkout
Introduction
Injector Head Mount Inspections
Basic System Checkout
ECG Trigger Checkout
Oscilloscope Checkout

5-1
5-2
5-2
5-6
5-9

1-1

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

1-2

CPU Card
CPU - Summary of Operation
CPU Card Type B
Block Diagram: CPU Card Type B
CPU Card Type C
Block Diagram: CPU Card Type C
CPU Chip Designation Chart

6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6

Input/Output Card
I/O - Summary of Operation
Block Diagram: I/O Card

7-1
7-3

Servo Control Card


Servo Control Card - Summary of Operation
Block Diagram: SCC Card

8-1
8-4

Pre-Programmed Injection Card


PPI Card - Summary of Operation
PPI Card Type B
Block Diagram: PPI Card - Type B
PPI Card Type C
Block Diagram: PPI Card - Type C

9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5

Control Panel Circuit


Control Panel - Summary of Operation
Block Diagram: Control Panel

10 - 1
10 - 2

Power Drive Circuit


Description of Power Drive Circuit
PDC Card (Serial Numbers below 60000)
Block Diagrams: PDC Card
PDCP Card (Serial Numbers 60000 and above)
Block Diagrams: PDCP Card
PDCI Card (Serial Numbers 70000 and above)
Block Diagrams: PDCI Card

11 - 1
11 - 2
11 - 7
11 - 9
11 - 15
11 - 17
11 - 23

Mechanical Stop Drive


Mechanical Stop Drive Card - Summary of Operation
Block Diagram: MSD Card

12 - 1
12 - 2

Table of Contents
Power Supply Circuit
Power Supply Card - Summary of Operation
Block Diagram: PSP Card

13 - 1
13 - 2

Injector Head
Description of Injector Head
Description of Motor and Drive System
Description of Feedback Pots
Description of Syringe Heater
Circuit Descriptions:
Mark V Injector HeadCard A
Block Diagram: Head Card A
Mark V Plus Injector Head Card B
SIP Switch Settings
Block Diagram: Head Card B

14 - 3
14 - 5
14 - 6
14 - 10
14 - 11

Imaging System Interface - ISI 100


Description of Imaging System Interface ISI 100
Cautions
Analog Output Signals
Block Diagram: Analog Output Signals
Imaging System Interface Circuits
Block Diagram: Imaging System Interface
Z5 Option
Schematic: Siemens Interface (with switchbox)
Schematic: Siemens Interface (without switchbox)
Schematic: Phillips Interface XMC 925
Schematic: Phillips Angio Interface XMC 926
Schematic: Phillips Interface XMC 935
Schematic: Phillips R/F Interface XMC 936

15 - 1
15 - 2
15 - 4
15 - 5
15 - 6
15 - 9
15 - 10
15 - 11
15 - 12
15 - 13
15 - 13
15 - 14
15 - 14

Remote Panel
Description of Remote Panel
Remote Panel Control Card
Block Diagram: Remote Panel Digital Logic
DC to DC Converter
Block Diagram: Remote Panel DC to DC Converter

16 - 1
16 - 2
16 - 4
16 - 5
16 - 6

ECG Trigger and Scope


Description of ECG Trigger and Scope
ECG Input
Block Diagram: ECG Input Section
ECG Preamp: Low Level ECG Input
High Level ECG Input (ISI Card)
R-Wave Detection (I/O Card)

17 - 1
17 - 2
17 - 2
17 - 3
17 - 3
17 - 4

14 - 1
14 - 2
14 - 2
14 - 2

1-3

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


ECG/Scope Control Panel
Block Diagram: ECG/Scope Display Circuits
ECG/Scope Function Manager
Block Diagram: ECG/Scope Function Manager
Scope Input Control
Block Diagram: Scope Input Control
Scope Memory Card
Input Processor
Block Diagram: Scope Input Processor
Memory Processor
Block Diagram: Scope Memory Processor
Intensified Spot Circuit
Block Diagram: Scope Intensified Spot Circuit
Clock and Sync Circuiits
Block Diagram: Scope Clock and Sync Circuits
Flow Profile Generator
Block Diagram: Scope Flow Profile Generator
Scope Deflection Card
Block Diagram: Scope Deflection Card
Scope Power Supply Card
Block Diagram: Scope Power Supply Card

Diagrams
For a complete list of all drawings included
in Section 18 or any other section, see the
Table of Illustrations found in this section.

Troubleshooting Guide
Required Tools and Test Equipment
Replacement Parts
Suggested Spare Parts
System Interchangeability Matrix
Interchangeability Matrix
Replacement Circuitry
How to Order Parts
Service Access Card (SAC)
SAC Test Points
Troubleshooting Guide:
Introduction
General Troubleshooting Guidelines
Suggested Troubleshooting Sequence
Message Faults:
List of Sentinel Messages
Non-Message Faults:
Dead Unit
No Drive
Will Not Inject
Garbled Message

1-4

17 - 5
17 - 6
17 - 6
17 - 7
17 - 7
17 - 8
17 - 10
17 - 10
17 - 10
17 - 11
17 - 11
17 - 12
17 - 12
17 - 13
17 - 14
17 - 14
17 - 15
17 - 16
17 - 17
17 - 18

18 - 1

19 - 1
19 - 3
19 - 3
19 - 5
19 - 6
19 - 7
19 - 10
19 - 11
19 - 12
19 - 15
19 - 16
19 - 18
19 - 19
19 - 19
19 - 45
19 - 46
19 - 47
19 - 48
19 - 48

Table of Contents
No ECG or Scope Display
No Scope Display
Weak or Erratic R-Waves
High-Level ECG Input
Low-Level ECG Input

19 - 49
19 - 49
19 - 50
19 - 50
19 - 51

System Disassembly and Reassembly Procedures


Control Unit
PC Cards
Overlay
Motherboard
Cord Reel
Power Chassis
PC Cards
Injector Head
Covers
Syringe Heater
Plunger Position Pot
Mechanical Stop Pot
Plunger Motor Drive Belt
Plunger Drive Motor
Mechanical Stop Motor (Type 2)
Mechanical Stop Motor (Type 3)
Mechanical Stop Motor (Type 4)
Head Control Panel
Turret Limit Switch
Mechanical Stop Limit Switch
Injector Head Cable (Mark V)
Injector Head Cable (Mark V Plus)
Oil Seal
Pivot Knuckle Adjustment
Power Switch
Line Voltage Conversion
Line Frequency Conversion
Line Frequency Checkout

20 - 14
20 - 15
20 - 17
20 - 20
20 - 22
20 - 24
20 - 26
20 - 28
20 - 30
20 - 32
20 - 35
20 - 36
20 - 37
20 - 38
20 - 39
20 - 41
20 - 42
20 - 43
20 - 46
20 - 48

Service Parts
Injector Head Parts
Console Parts
Cables
Miscellaneous

21 - 1
21 - 2
21 - 3
21 - 4

20 - 2
20 - 4
20 - 5
20 - 8
20 - 10
20 - 12
20 - 13

1-5

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


Table of Illustrations

1-6

Section 6: CPU Card


CPU BOARD ASSEMBLY
20K SERIES CPU BOARD ASSY

78101-10-AP-14
78101-10-AP-01-1

6-7
6-9

Section 7: I/O Card


I/O BOARD ASSEMBLY

78101-10-AP-02

7-5

Section 8: SCC Card


SERVO CONTROL ASSEMBLY

78101-10-AP-03-1

8-5

Section 9: PPI Card


PPI CARD ASSEMBLY

78101-10-AP-06-1

9-7

Section 10: Control Panel


KEYBRD. DISPLAY CARD ASSY.

78101-05-AP-02

10 - 3

Section 11: Power Drive Circuit


POWER DRIVE CARD ASSY.
POWER DRIVE CARD ASSY.
POWER DRIVE CARD ASSY.
POWER DRIVE RELAY CARD (INTL.)
POWER DRIVE RELAY CARD ASSY.
POWER CHASSIS MECH. ASSY.

78101-06-AP-10
78101-06-AP-09
78101-06-AP-06
85106-04-AP-03
85106-04-AP-02
78101-03-AM-07

11 - 25
11 - 28
11 - 31
11 - 34
11 - 36
11 - 38

Section 12: MSD Card


MECH. STOP DRIVE CARD ASSY.

78101-04-AP-05

12 - 3

Section 13: Power Supply Circuit


POWER SUPPLY CARD ASSY.
POWER SUPPLY CARD ASSY.

78101-07-AP-03
78101-07-AP-01

13 - 3
13 - 5

Section 14: Injector Head


INJ. HEAD. MJR. PTS. DETAIL.
INJECTOR HEAD DISPLAY CARD
MN 60/150 HEAD CARD ASSY.
HEAD MAJOR PARTS IDENT.
WIRING INTERCON. DIAG.
HEAD INTERCON. CD. ASSY.

78101-13-LD-02
3002033
78101-15-AP-01
78101-04-LD-01
78101-04-WI-01
78101-04-AP-07

14 - 13
14 - 16
14 - 18
14 - 20
14 - 23
14 - 25

Table of Contents
Table of Illustrations (continued)
Section 15: ISI 100
MK V PLUS OPTION CARD ASSY.
MK V ISI 100 CARD ASSY.

78101-10-AP-16
78101-10-AP-09

15 - 15
15 - 17

Section 16: Remote Panel


RPCP CARD ASSEMBLY (MN)
RPCP CARD ASSEMBLY
RPC CARD ASSEMBLY

85102-15-AP-01-3
85102-01-AP-02-3
85102-01-AP-01-1

16 - 7
16 - 10
16 - 13

Section 17: ECG/Scope


ECG/SCOPE INTERCON. SCHEM.
FRONT PNL. DISPLAY BD. ASSY.
SCOPE DISPLAY. MEM. CARD. ASSY.
SCOPE DEFL. CARD. ASSY.
SCOPE POWER SUPPLY CARD. ASSY.
ECG/SCOPE MODULE ASSEMBLY
CRM MAIN CARD ASSY
ECG PRE-AMP MDL. CRD. ASSY.

78101-08-WI-01
78101-08-AP-11
78101-08-AP-08
78101-08-AP-02
78101-08-AP-09
78101-00-AM-10
85106-10-AP-01
78101-09-AP-01

17 - 19
17 - 20
17 - 22
17 - 25
17 - 27
17 - 29
17 - 33
17 - 36

Section 18: Drawings


INTL. PEDESTAL INTERCONNECTIION
ANALOG INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM
MN PEDESTAL INTERCONNECT
60/150 INJ. CON. IDENT./LOC. DETAIL
60/150 INJ. CON. IDENT./LOC. DETAIL
MK V PLUS COLUMN WIRING DIAG.
60/150 INJ. CNSL/COL. WRNG DIAG.
CONSOLE/COLMN WRNG. DIAG.
MOTHERBOARD EPI/ESR
CRC PLUS CON. LOCATION DETAIL
INTL. CRC MOTHERBOARD ASSY.
MN CRC MOTHERBOARD ASSY.
MN LPM WIRING DETAIL
MN INTERFACE CON. CARD ASSY.

410004337
78101-00-WI-02
78101-15-WI-02
78101-00-LD-06
78101-00-LD-05
78101-03-WI-07
78101-03-WI-06
78101-03-WI-01
78101-03-AP-06
87101-15-LD-01
85106-07-AP-03-5
85106-07-AP-02-5
78101-15-WI-01
78101-15-AP-04

18 - 2
18 - 3
18 - 4
18 - 6
18 - 7
18 - 8
18 - 10
18 - 12
18 - 14
18 - 16
18 - 17
18 - 19
18 - 21
18 - 22

1-7

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


NOTES:

1-8

Introduction

2 Introduction
Copyright Notice

Copyright 2010 by MEDRAD, INC. All rights reserved. No part of this


manual may be reproduced in any form without prior written permission of Medrad. Printed and assembled in the U.S.A.

Trademarks

Mark V Injector, Mark V Plus Injector, FluiDot, Medrad, and Quality for
Life, are registered trademarks of Medrad Incorporated.

Patents

The Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems are the subject of the
following U.S. patent numbers: 4,677,980; 4,854,324; 5,383,858.

Restricted Sale
Applicability

Federal (U.S.A.) law restricts the sale of this device to, or by the order
of a physician.
This manual applies to Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems in
the following configurations:
Pedestal Mounted Systems:
SYS 500-P, SYS 500, SYS 500 P2I, and SYS P2ID
Control Room Consoles:
RMT 505-P/510-P, RMT 505/510,
RMT 505 P2I/510 P2I, and RMT 505 P2ID/510 P2ID
Remote Panel Systems:
RPS 615(P) and RPS-500
Models SYS500 P2I, SYS500 P2ID, RMT505 P2I, RMT 505 P2ID,
RMT 510 P2I, and RMT 510 P2ID are designed to be in compliance
with EN 60601-1 (Safety) and EN 60601-1-2 (EMC/Emissions). ECG
and Ocilloscope options to the SYS 500 and RMT 505 model systems
do not comply with the EN 60601-1-2 standards, and are not available
with any P2I system model number.
Represents compliance to the European Council
Directive concerning medical devices - 94/42/EEC.

Purpose

Important
Safety Notice

This manual is intended to provide instructions for servicing the Mark


V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems safely and accurately. It is
intended for those qualified to service the injection system, whether
they be Medrad Service Personnel, Laboratory Service Technicians, or
Medrad Authorized Dealers.
The information in this manual is intended for people with adequate
backgrounds and experience in electronics and electromechanical
devices. Any attempt to repair a sophisticated medical device such as
the injector may result in personal injury, property damage, or patient
injury.
2-1

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


Disclaimers

Medrad makes no warranties on the contents of this manual, and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any
purpose.
Medrad reserves the right to change specifications and the contents of this
manual without obligation.
Medrad reserves the right to modify the specifications and features
described herein, or discontinue manufacture of the product described at
any time, without prior notice or obligation. Please contact your authorized
Medrad representative for the most current information.
External Wiring and Modification: Medrad disclaims liability for any
modifications or interfaces with other equipment which are not in conformity with the specifications and information contained within this manual.
Such unauthorized action could jeopardize injector operation, safety, or
reliability.
Accessory equipment connected to the system interfaces must be certified
according the IEC 601-1 standards. Furthermore, all P2I configurations
with attached accessory equipment shall comply with the system standard
IEC 601-1-1. Anyone who connects additional equipment to the signal
input or output configures a medical system, and is therefore responsible
that the system complies with the requirements of the system standard
IEC 601-1-1. To obtain on-site consulting or consulting references, contact
Medrad Factory Service.
All drawings in this manual are for reference purposes only, and may not
reflect the construction of units produced prior to the publication of this
manual. Reproduction quality of these drawings may have been affected
by the level of reduction required. Call Medrad Factory Service if assistance in drawing interpretation is required.
Mark V and Mark V Plus Injectors are not intended for portable use.

Problems or
Questions

If you experience problems with any Medrad Injection System, contact:


Medrad Factory Service
MEDRAD, INC.
One Medrad Drive
Indianola, PA 15051-0780
Phone: (412) 767-2400
1-800-MEDRAD-S
1-800-633-7237
FAX:
(412) 767-4126

2-2

MEDRAD EUROPE, B.V.


Postbus 205
6190 AE BEEK
The Netherlands
Phone: (31) (0) 43 3585601
FAX: (31) (0) 43 3656598
Nihon MEDRAD K.K.
2-4-9, Umeda, Kita-ku,
Osaka 530-0001
Japan
Phone: (81) (0) 66 133-6250
FAX: (81) (0) 66 344-2395

Introduction
INTRODUCTION TO

WARNINGS / CAUTIONS
This manual contains important information about safe servicing of the
Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems.
Medrad urges the service technician to read this manual carefully,
become familiar with the procedures and system functions that it
describes, and follow its recommendations to assure proper servicing
of the system.
Warning labels on the Mark V and Mark V Plus systems or Warning
statements in this manual preceeded by any of the following words
and/or symbols are of special significance:

WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation. If


not avoided, this could result in death or serious injury.

WARNING: Indicates electrical hazards which could result


in death or serious injury.

CAUTION: Indicates potential hazards or unsafe practices


which could cause product, system, or property damage.

NOTE: Indicates helpful information is being offered.

Intended Use

This device is intended to be used specifically for the purpose of injecting intravenous contrast medium into humans, for the purpose of diagnostic studies. DO NOT attempt to use the injector for any other
purpose.

Contraindications

This device is not to be used for drug infusion, chemotherapy, or any


other use for which the device is not indicated.

WARNINGS

Hazardous voltages exist within the Mark V and Mark V


Plus Systems that can shock, burn, or cause death. To
avoid injury, the system should be opened and serviced by
qualified service personnel only. Disconnect the system
from line power before cleaning or attempting to perform
any maintenance or repairs.

Possible explosion hazard in the presence of flammable


anesthetic gases. The Mark V and Mark V Plus systems
are not designed for use in association with anesthetic
gases and equipment.
2-3

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

WARNINGS
(continued)

Disconnect the patient immediately from the injector if any system malfunction occurs. If a system malfunction message
appears, do not attempt to use the system until the source of the
condition has been identified and corrected by qualified service
personnel. Do not attempt to recreate any fault conditions while
connected to a patient.
Electronic assemblies contain potentially hazardous materials.
Dispose of system components or accessories properly.
Follow all local regulations for the recycling or disposal of
electronic assemblies, or contact Medrad Service for
assistance.
Worn power cords or control cables may shock, injure, or cause
death. Examine power cords and cables for cuts, frays, or any
other visible damage. Do not use the system if any of the cords
or cables show signs of damage. Any damaged or worn connection cables or power cords should be replaced.
Check for proper voltage and frequency before connecting the
injector to an electrical outlet. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or equipment damage/malfunction. Check the voltage and frequency marked on the back of the unit. Ensure that
the outlet providing power to the injector supplies a voltage, frequency, and volt-ampere rating within the range specified.
Do not immerse any injection components in water or any type
of cleaning solution. Fluid entry into the system may result in a
shock hazard.

2-4

Ensure that the FluiDot labels are clearly visible on all pressure
jackets. FluiDot labels are intended to help in the avoidance of
air embolization, which could result in patient injury or death.

Do not move the injector or pedestal by pulling on the syringe


heater cable. This practice will cause the pivot pin to wear prematurely, and may cause the injector head to fall, resulting in
possible patient or technician injury.

Introduction

CAUTIONS
!

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). Failure to follow ESD protection practices may result in equipment damage. To avoid
damage, ESD protection practices must be followed when
servicing any component of this system. If memory components are to be shipped, place the components in conductive
carriers (as supplied at Medrad).

Disconnect the power cord before removing or replacing PC


boards. Sensitive circuits on the boards can be damaged by
abrupt interruption or application of supplies.

Allow system temperature to stabilize before use. When the


system is exposed to an extreme temperature change (heat
or cold), allow it to stabilize to room temperature before servicing.

Use only accessories and options designed specifically for


the Mark V and Mark V Plus systems. To ensure compatibility
and proper operation, do not use an accessory or option
designed for another system.

Perform regular preventive maintenance. To ensure that your


injection system remains properly calibrated, and that all primary and backup circuits are functioning properly, regular
preventive maintenance is recommended. An annual preventive maintenance package (offered in the U.S.A., Canada,
and Europe) is available at an additional cost. Contact your
local Medrad Factory Service Representative for details.
Do not soak or immerse any part of the injection system in
water. Improper or careless cleaning methods may result in
equipment damage. While cleaning any outside portion of the
system, avoid allowing any water to seep inside system components.

Do not short the PPI Card Batteries. Do not place the card or
the batteries on any conductive surface. When checking or
replacing the PPI card batteries, discharge can occur with
even a momentary short.

Do not connect injector head extension cables in parallel.


Connecting the extension cables in parallel, or extending the
total extension length beyond 100 feet (30.5 m), can
adversely effect injector performance and specifications.

NOTE: All relevant institutional, local, or national safety regulations related to cable routing and installation should be
followed.

2-5

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

CAUTIONS
(continued)

2-6

Do not apply voltage to external start lines if the injector is


being started by an external start connection. Provide only a
switch closure. If the external circuit contains excessive line
frequency noise or voltage transients, injector damage or
malfunction may result.
Do not plug the cord reel connector into the Auxiliary Start
Switch Connector at J13. If not in use, allow the cord reel
connector to remain disconnected. This improper connection
could result in internal equipment damage or malfunction.
The Remote Start Signal from the film changer programmer
(at pins 7 and 9 of J40), must never contain voltage or AC
noise. Any voltage applied to these pins can damage the
injector and void the warranty. An excess of 50 or 60 cycle
AC noise on these lines may cause intermittent problems of
premature, or no injections.
The Remote Start Signal from the film changer programmer
must remain closed throughout the duration of the injection. If
the start signal is removed before the injection volume limits
when armed in the SINGLE mode, the injection will stop, the
unit will disarm, and display PREMATURE TERMINATION
on the Control Panel. If the start signal is removed before the
injection volume limits when armed in the MULTIple mode,
the injection will stop, the Mechanical Stop will reposition at
the selected volume, and the unit will remain armed. If a start
signal is received at this time, an additional injection will
result at the selected Flow Rate and Volume.
When starting the injection process from a remote location by
the use of a relay closure in the film changer programmer,
always install a panic button in series with the start signal.
This function must be provided in the event that the operator
must immediately terminate the injection. This button should
be installed in a convenient location, properly labeled, and
instructions for use provided to all users of the injection system.
Do not apply voltage to ISI connector J40 pins 5,6,7,8 or 9.
Equipment damage or malfunction may result.

Do not connenct the J19/J20 X-ray connector to the J13 Auxiliary Start connector. Equipment damage or malfunction may
result.

Preventive Maintenance

Preventive
Maintenance
This section contains recommended procedures for preventive maintenance of Mark V and Mark V Plus injection systems. Routine maintenance and inspection will:

Recommended
Procedures

Ensure the continued performance of your injector.

Reduce the possibility of equipment malfunction.

Preventive maintenance of the injection system should consist of four


procedures: Inspection, cleaning, performance checks, and leakage
checks. This section contains guidelines, recommended methods,
and expected results for each of these procedures:
1. Inspection: This first step should encompass inspection of the
entire system, looking for obvious signs of damage, such as;
cracks in the housing, frayed or worn cables, missing or damaged
labels, and contrast spills that may have leaked into the injector.
2. Cleaning: This cleaning procedure involves thorough cleaning of
the console and head to remove any deposits of contrast medium.
If any substances have leaked into any part of the unit, the subassembly should be disassembled and thoroughly cleaned.
3. Electrical Leakage / Ground Continuity Checks: To ensure the
safety of the patient and hospital personnel in injector operations.
4. Operational Checkout: A complete functional performance checkout of the injection system.

4-1

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


Recommended
Schedule

Your Mark V or Mark V Plus Injection System must be properly maintained to ensure that it is in peak operating condition. Your individual
maintenance schedule depends upon how your injector is used; the
type of procedures performed, and frequency of use. The following
guidelines represent a suggested maintenance schedule:

Daily:
Before use each day, the system should be inspected, and the piston
rod thoroughly cleaned.
Monthly:
Once a month, the entire system should be thoroughly inspected and
cleaned, and an operational checkout should be performed.
Annually:
Once per year, Electrical Leakage and Ground Continuity checks
should be performed.
NOTE: Local regulations or hospital protocol may require electrical leakage checks at more frequent intervals. If this
applies, local regulations for leakage must be followed.
Medrad also recommends that a complete system calibration and performance checkout, by a qualified Medrad Service Representative, be
performed once a year. Contact Medrad Factory Service, or your local
Medrad office for details.
In the United States, Canada, Europe, and other select areas of the
world, the Medrad Service Department offers Preventive Maintenance
Programs. These annual programs greatly assist in maintaining accuracy and reliability, and can extend the life of the injection system.
Contact Medrad for details. In Europe, contact Medrad Europe B.V., or
your local dealer, for further information. Refer to Section 2 of this
manual for address and telephone numbers.
NOTE: Failures which occur due to lack of proper maintenance, or abuse, will not be covered under warranty.

4-2

Preventive Maintenance

Inspection
Procedures

The following procedures are recommended for the Injector Head,


Control Unit, Remote Panel (if the system is so equipped), and mounting systems. If defects are detected, either repair the system, or call
Medrad for service. Do not use the unit until the problem has been
corrected.

Injector Head

1. Inspect the head case for any cracks that could allow fluid to leak
inside, or weaken the case.
2. Inspect the head cable for cuts, cracks, or worn areas.
3. Inspect the head connector for cracks, loose pins, or a loose strain
relief.
4. Inspect the Pressure Jackets for small cracks, crazing, or discoloration. As a matter of preventive maintenance, we recommend
replacement of the pressure jackets annually.
5. Inspect the syringe heater and cable; look for cuts, cracks, or any
worn areas.
6. Inspect the Control Panel for cuts or cracks that could allow fluid
to leak inside.

Control Unit

1. Inspect the Control Unit and Control Panel case for cracks that
could allow fluid to leak inside, or weaken the assembly.
2. Inspect the power cord for cuts, cracks, or worn spots. Inspect the
plug for cracks, loose prongs, loose wires, or a loose strain relief.
3. Inspect the handswitch and cord: Look for cuts, cracks, or worn
spots in the cable; look for cracks and loose parts in the switch
and housing.
4. Inspect the film changer connector and cord: Look for cuts,
cracks, or worn spots in the cable; look for loose pins, or a loose
strain relief on the connector.
5. Inspect any other cables connected to the control unit: Look for
cuts, cracks, or worn spots in the cables; look for cracks, loose
pins, or loose strain reliefs on the connectors.

Remote Panel

1. Inspect the Remote Unit and Control Panel case for cracks that
could allow fluid to leak inside, or weaken the assembly.
2. Inspect the interface cable for cuts, cracks, or worn spots. Inspect
the connector for cracks, loose prongs, or a loose strain relief.
3. Inspect the handswitch, cord, and connector: Look for cuts,
cracks, or worn spots in the cable; look for cracks and loose parts
in the switch, housing, and connector.

4-3

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


Pedestal Mount

1. Inspect the case and legs for cracks and other defects that could
weaken the structure.
2. Ensure that all mounting bolts and screws are secure.
3. Inspect the connectors on the pedestal for cracks or loose pins.
4. Ensure that the casters roll smoothly, with no binding and scraping.
5. Ensure that the locking mechanism on all locking casters is functional.

Injector Head
Support Arm

The injector head support arm is typically associated with pedestal type
injection systems and free standing injector head stands. Carefully
inspect the areas shown below for any signs of damage.

Figure 4.1: Head Supprt Arm Inspection


The injector head pivot knuckle should rest flat and rotate smoothly on the
support arm. The injector head, or support arm, should not rotate more
than 360 degrees. If either assembly is able to rotate more than 360
degrees, one or more of the stop pins is not properly positioned, or is
missing.
If the stop pins are not in the proper position, the head cable can wrap
around the support arm, causing damage to the head cable, and possibly
lifting the injector head from the support arm. Contact Medrad Factory
Service for support arm replacement information.

4-4

Preventive Maintenance
Counterpoise
Systems

1. Inspect all parts of the mounting system for cracks and other
defects that would weaken the assembly.
2. Ensure that the mounting system is securely assembled, with no
loose parts. The system should be stable with the head installed.
3. Ensure that the system moves smoothly in all directions, with no
binding, scraping, or drifting.
4. Verify that all cabling is tied back and does not interfere with the
movement of the supporting parts or the injector head.
NOTE: All relevant guidelines for institutional, local, or national
safety recommendations related to cable routing and
installation should be followed.

Syringe Heater

1. Ensure that the device is warm to the touch.


2. Ensure that the LED indicator is not illuminated or flashing when
installed on the pressure jacket/syringe. The lamp may illuminate
if the syringe heater is not installed on the pressure jacket/syringe.
If the lamp is illuminated while the heater is installed on the pressure jacket/syringe, the heater is too hot and should be replaced.
3. Inspect the cable and connector for cracks, worn areas, loose
pins, or a loose strain relief.

4-5

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Cleaning
Procedure

Deposits of contrast media can interfere with proper operation of the


Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems. The following guidelines
should be followed when removing deposits, or cleaning any portion
of the system.
WARNING: Remove the power cord from the power
source before cleaning any part of the system. Failure to
do this could result in the exposure of lethal voltages,
causing injury or death.

Using warm water and soft cloths, clean the injector console and
head thoroughly to remove contrast medium or other deposits.

The injector head requires particular attention. Remove the turret,


then: Clean the front casting where the piston moves in and out;
Clean the turret and its pivot point; Remove any contrast from the
entire length of the piston rod.

If contrast medium has leaked inside the head or console, the


affected subassembly should be disassembled and cleaned. This
cleaning procedure can be done in the field by trained Medrad
Service personnel, or returned to Medrad Factory Service. If the
cleaning will be performed in the field by a properly trained individual, ensure that any internal wiring or components are not disturbed, and that the system is completely dry before applying
power.

Check all of the System Safety and Warning Labels for legibility.
Ensure that the labels are not damaged or missing.

4-6

CAUTION: Do not soak or immerse any parts of the injector in water. Improper or careless cleaning methods may
result in equipment damage. While cleaning the outside of
the unit, avoid letting any liquids seep inside injector components.

WARNING: Ensure that the system is completely dry


before connecting to a power source and applying power.

Preventive Maintenance

Leakage
Check

To insure safe operation of the injector, a leakage check must be part


of regular preventive maintenance.
Use a commercial leakage tester such as one of the following:

Manufacturer

Model

Bio-Tek Instruments, Inc.


Electrical Safety Analyzer

Model 501

Dynatech Nevada, Inc.


Electrical Safety Analyzer

PEI Model 2000A

Ohmic Instruments Co.

BET-300 Series or
HSM-200 Series

Bender

Safety Tester 601 or


Unimet 1000 ST

1. With the AC ground open, power applied, and the line at normal,
leakage should be less than 100 micro amps.
2. With the AC ground open, power applied and the line reversed,
leakage should be less than 100 micro amps.
3. Disconnect the leakage test box.

Ground
Continuity
Check

A ground continuity check must also be a part of regular maintenance


of the Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems.
1. Disconnect the injector from the power source.
2. Using an ohm meter, measure the resistance between the ground
terminal on the power cord and any exposed metal suface of the
system. The resistance measured must be less than 0.2 ohms.

4-7

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


NOTES:

4-8

Checkout Procedure

5
Introduction

Checkout Procedure
These checkout procedures test the major functions of the Mark V
and Mark V Plus. These procedures should be followed:

Before using the unit for the first time


As part of a routine preventive maintenance program
(check operation monthly with this procedure)
If a problem or miscalibration is suspected
After repairs

Read the steps first, then do them. Many steps require more than one
observation. Some steps will need to be timed.
To do these checkouts, a stopwatch, a watch with a digital seconds
timer or seconds hand, or a timer is required.
NOTE: If the unit fails to perform as outlined in any of the following procedures, or any error messages appear,
refer to Section 19, Troubleshooting Guide.

Basic Unit
Checkout Procedure

This procedure checks the basic functions of any Mark V or Mark V


Plus system. Regardless of the configuration or what options are on
your system, start with this procedure. Then continue with the others
in the order they appear in this section.
This procedure is valid for all models and configurations of the Mark V
or Mark V Plus injector including the RMT 510 model in which the system is operated solely from a Remote Panel, with no Control Panel on
the console. With this kind of system, any reference to a Control Panel
in the following procedure refers to the Remote Panel.

5-1

Mark V / Mark V Plus Injection Systems


Injector Head
Mount Inspections

A safe and effective injector mounting system must be maintained to


prevent personal injury and/or equipment damage. An important part
of inspection should include the injector head support arm typically
associated with pedestal injector systems (SYS 500 or SYS 500-P)
and the free standing injector head stand (KMA-320 or KMA-320T).
The injector head pivot knuckle should sit flat and rotate smoothly on
the support arm. The injector head should not rotate more than 360
degrees. Periodically lift the head from the support arm and check for
the presence of the injector head stop pin. If the pin is not in place, the
head cable can wrap around the arm, causing damage to the head
cable and possibly forcing the injector head off of the support arm.
The support arm should be inspected for cracks where the head rests
on the arm and at the base where it is attached to the injector or the
injector head stand. If a crack is present, the crack can lengthen, compromising the integrity of the arm.

Initial Checks

1. Get the injector ready:


With the exception of the head cable, disconnect any cables from
the connector panel on the back of the injector.
If your system is a Control Room Console without an integral Control Panel, leave the Remote Panel connected. If your system
includes a Remote Panel and has a Control Panel on the console,
disconnect the Remote Panel.
Remove and discard any syringes from the pressure jackets on
the injector head.
Rotate the turret to the vertical (or ready to inject) position.
Position the Rotating Piston Plunger Release lever on the back of
the injector head horizontally.
2. Check the initial response of the injector.
Connect the system to a compatible electrical power source, then
apply power. The SENTINEL should display:
SELF TEST IN PROGRESS VER MV (or PR) X.X
The MV (or PR) X.X message indicates the software version
installed in the unit. During the self test, all LEDs on the Control
Panel should illuminate, and all windows should display 8s and
decimal points. If any segments do not illuminate, the unit requires
repair and should not be used.

5-2

Checkout Procedure
Injector Head

2. Fully advance and retract the injector head plunger using the load
controls on the head control panel. Ensure that the plunger moves
freely, without binding, rubbing, or scraping.

ML/SEC

3. Enter the following injection parameters


RISE / FALL
FLOW RATE
VOLUME
INJECTION DURATION
PRESSURE
X-RAY DELAY

0 Seconds
10 ML/SEC
25 ML
2.5 seconds
1000 psi
2 seconds

Arm the injector in the SINGLE mode, then inject. When the injection is complete, check the injection STATUS, verifying that the
actual results fall within the following ranges:
FLOW RATE
VOLUME
INJECTION DURATION
PRESSURE
X-RAY DELAY

ML/MIN

9.2-10.8 ML/SEC
24.1-25.9 ML
2.2-2.8 seconds
less than 100 psi
2 seconds

4. Enter the following injection parameters


FLOW RATE
VOLUME
PRESSURE

59 ML/MIN
29.5 ML
150 psi

Arm the injector in the SINGLE mode, then inject. When the injection is complete, check the injection STATUS, verifying that the
actual results fall within the following ranges:
FLOW RATE
VOLUME
INJECTION DURATION
PRESSURE

56 - 62 ML/MIN
28.6 - 30.4 ML
0.4 - 0.6 minutes
less than 50 psi

5-3

Mark V / Mark V Plus Injection Systems


ML/HR

5. Enter the following injection parameters:


FLOW RATE
VOLUME

50 ML/HR
25 ML

NOTE: This injection will last approximately 30 minutes. A


KMP 551 adaptor can be used to keep the handswitch
depressed throughout the injection.
Arm the injector in the SINGLE mode, then inject. When the injection is complete, check the injection STATUS, verifying that the
actual results fall within the following ranges:
FLOW RATE
VOLUME
INJECTION DURATION
PRESSURE

Rise/Fall

45 - 55 ML/HR
24.1-25.9 ML
0.4 - 0.6 Hours
less than 50 psi

6. Enter the following injection parameters


RISE / FALL
FLOW RATE
VOLUME
PRESSURE

8 Seconds
15 ML/SEC
105 ML
1000 psi

Arm the injector in the SINGLE mode, then inject. The plunger
should accelerate steadily for 8 seconds, then continue at a
steady rate for 3 additional seconds. When the injection is complete, check the injection STATUS, verifying that the actual results
fall within the following ranges:
FLOW RATE
VOLUME
INJECTION DURATION
PRESSURE

Delay Timer

14 - 16 ML/SEC
103.4 - 106.6 ML
10 - 12 seconds
less than 50 psi

7. Enter the following injection parameters


RISE / FALL
FLOW RATE
VOLUME
PRESSURE
X-RAY DELAY

0 Seconds
1 ML/SEC
30 ML
1000 psi
10 seconds

Arm the injector in the MULTI injection mode, then inject. Carefully
listen for an audible click (closing of the internal X-ray trigger
relay) approximately 9 to 11 seconds into the injection.

5-4

Checkout Procedure
Change the programmed X-ray delay to an Inject Delay of 5 seconds. Arm the injector in the SINGLE mode, then inject. Ensure
that the injection begins approximately 5 seconds after the handswitch is depressed.
Pre-Programmed
Injections

8. Reset all injection parameters using the RESET function. The


Level and Total Levels windows will display a 1, all other windows
should display a 0.
Enter the following injection parameters:
RISE / FALL
FLOW RATE
VOLUME
INJECTION DURATION
PRESSURE
X-RAY DELAY

4 Seconds
28 ML/SEC
112 ML
6 Seconds
925 psi
2 seconds

Name and store the injection parameters using the STORE function. Remove power from the system for at least one minute, then
re-apply system power. Using the RECALL function, recall the
stored injection parameters, verifying that the Control Panel windows display injection parameters entered above.

Remote Panel

9. If the injection system is equipped with a Remote Panel in addition


to the Control Panel, ensure that the Remote Panel is the Master
mode, repeat the ML/SEC, ML/MIN, ML/HR, Rise/Fall, Delay
Timer, and Pre-Programmed Injection checks outlined above.
NOTE: Use the Remote Panel handswitch for all of these
injections

End of basic checkout procedure.

5-5

Mark V / Mark V Plus Injection Systems


ECG Trigger
Checkout Procedure

This procedure checks the performance of the ECG trigger section, an


option for the Mark V and Mark V Plus systems. The function of the
ECG trigger is the same for the Mark V and Mark V Plus systems.
With all systems, follow the basic procedure first, then check the ECG
section according to this procedure.
NOTE: The system must be equipped with software version
PR3.0 or above to operate the ECG section.
To perform this checkout, connect an ECG input from a simulator to
the injector. There are two ways to do this. First, connect the simulator
to a monitor, then connect a high-level signal from the monitor to J44
on the back of the injector. The following items are required to complete this section of the checkout:

High-Level ECG Input Cable (included with ECG trigger


option)
High-Level ECG Signal (such as from an ECG monitor)
ECG Simulator (see below for suitable choice)

The second way to connect an ECG input is to connect the simulator


to the ECG preamp that connects at J44 on the back of the injector.
The following items are required to complete this section of the checkout (since the preamp is optional, your system may not include it):

ECG Preamp PMI 100


Patient Cable (included with preamp)
ECG Simulator (see below for suitable choice)

The following ECG simulators, or their equivalents, are suitable for


this checkout. All are inexpensive, portable, battery powered, and
have adjustable rates:

Manufacturer
Model
__________________________________________
Biohio Systems Co.
EH-5N
Bio-Tek Instruments, Inc.
ECG/R
Cambridge Medical Instruments
4350
Medi Cal Instruments Inc.
410
Phipps L Bird Inc.
7092-450
Valmedix
323-100
1. With the exception of the head cable, Control Room Monitor, and
Analog and Digital cables (Control Room Console only), disconnect any cables plugged into the connector panel on the back
(including the Remote Panel if the system includes one).

5-6

Checkout Procedure
2. Connect the injector to a power source, then apply power. Ensure
that power is applied to the ECG trigger section of the injector, and
removed from the Oscilloscope section.
3. Connect an ECG simulator to the ECG input then enter the following injection parameters:
RISE/FALL
FLOW RATE
VOLUME
PRESSURE
DELAY

0 seconds
15 ML/SEC
10 ML
1000 psi
0 seconds, X-RAY

4. Set the ECG simulator to 60 BPM. The HEART RATE window


should display a value between 57-63 BPM, and the R-R SEC
window should display a value between 0.95-1.05 seconds. Adjust
the Gain control as required.
Enter the following parameters on the ECG Control Panel:
DELAY
# BOLUS
R-WAVE TERMination

0 seconds
4
OFF

5. Arm the injector in the SINGLE mode, then inject. When the injection is complete, check the injection STATUS, verifying that the
actual results fall within the following ranges:
FLOW RATE
VOLUME
INJECTION DURATION
PRESSURE

13.5 - 16.5 ML/SEC


35 - 45 ML
0.5 - 0.7 seconds
less than 100 psi

6. Enter the following parameters on the Control and ECG Panels:


RISE/FALL
FLOW RATE
VOLUME
PRESSURE
DELAY

0 seconds
10 ML/SEC
15 ML
1000 psi
0 seconds, X-RAY

DELAY
# BOLUS
R-WAVE TERMination

0.5 seconds
5
ON

7. Arm in the SINGLE injection mode, then inject. The plunger


should not move until after the first R-Wave. The plunger should
then advance 5 ml, stop, then resume with each subsequent RWave.

5-7

Mark V / Mark V Plus Injection Systems


When the injection cycle is complete, check the injection STATUS,
verifying that the actual results fall within the following ranges:
FLOW RATE
VOLUME
INJECTION DURATION
PRESSURE

9.2 -10.8 ML/SEC


24.1 - 25.9 ML
0.4 - 0.6 seconds
less than 100 psi

8. Ensure that the following parameters are entered on the ECG


Control Panel:
DELAY
# BOLUS
R-WAVE TERMination
X-RAY SYNC

End of ECG Checkout Procedure

5-8

0 seconds
1
OFF
ON

Checkout Procedure
Oscilloscope
Checkout Procedure

This procedure provides a basic performance check of the Oscilloscope option (abbreviated Scope) for the Mark V and Mark V Plus
systems.
1. Apply power to the Scope. Ensure that there are two traces on the
screen, then ensure that the following default parameters are displayed on the Control Panel:
SWEEP MODE
SWEEP SPEED
INPUT SELECT (Top Channel)
INPUT SELECT (Bottom Channel)

CONTinuous
25 MM/SEC
ECG
INJ

2. Enter the following parameters:


SWEEP MODE
SWEEP SPEED
INPUT SELECT (Top Channel)
INPUT SELECT (Bottom Channel)

CONTinuous
10 MM/SEC
AUX 1
AUX 2

3. Position the Channel 1 trace at the uppermost Horizontal grid line,


then re-position the trace at the lowest Horizontal grid line. Press
and hold the CHANNEL 1 GAIN increase arrow for 10 seconds.
Press the 1MV CAL button, ensuring that the trace deflects
upward 5 to 7 divisions.
4. Position the Channel 1 trace at the third division from the top of
the screen. Set the CHANNEL 1 INPUT SELECT to INJ.
5. Position the Channel 2 trace at the uppermost Horizontal grid line,
then position the trace at the lowest Horizontal grid line, then reposition the trace at the second line up from the bottom.
6. Set the CHANNEL 2 GAIN to allow the trace to deflect 4 divisions
by pressing the 20 ML CAL button.
7. Press and release the 20 ML CAL button. The pulse should take
9.5 to 10.5 seconds to travel across the display.
8. Select a SWEEP SPEED of 25 mm/sec. Press and release the 20
ML CAL button. The pulse should take 3.6 to 4.4 seconds to travel
across the display.
9. Select a SWEEP SPEED of 50 mm/sec. Press and release the 20
ML CAL button. The pulse should take 1.8 to 2.2 seconds to travel
across the display.

5-9

Mark V / Mark V Plus Injection Systems


10. Enter the following injection parameters:
RISE/FALL
FLOW RATE
VOLUME
PRESSURE
DELAY

0 seconds
10 ML/SEC
15 ML
1000 psi
0 seconds, X-RAY

11. Arm the injector in the SINGLE mode, then inject. The lower trace
should gradually deflect three divisions, then return to the base
line.
12. Apply power to the ECG option. Connect an ECG simulator input
to J44 on the rear connector panel. Set the simulator for 60 BPM.
Ensure that the GAIN is set to allow the R-Wave to flash with each
beat of the simulator.
13. Ensure that channel 1 of the scope displays the R-wave, and that
the R-wave signal deflects at least two divisions.
14. Enter the following injection/ECG parameters:
RISE/FALL
FLOW RATE
VOLUME
PRESSURE
DELAY

0 seconds
17 ML/SEC
15 ML
1000 psi
0 seconds, X-RAY

DELAY
# BOLUS
R-WAVE TERMination

0.41 seconds
2
ON

15. Set the SWEEP MODE to AUTO, then Arm in the SINGLE injection mode and inject.
16. Ensure that the following events and conditions occur:

5 - 10

The scope screen will clear when the start switch is


pressed, then start sweeping.
The plunger should start moving on the first R-Wave (after
pressing the start switch).
The bottom trace displays two ramped wave forms, each
deflected upward two divisions.
The start of each ramp coincides with the location of the
intensified dot on the ECG waveform.
The end of each ramp coincides with the R-Wave.
The scope should stop sweeping approximately 0.25 seconds after the completion of the injection.

Checkout Procedure
17.Select the INJ PREV function on the ECG option. The scope
should simulate the previous injection, without actually injecting.
NOTE:Return the syringe size and pressure setting back to
those programmed before beginning the checkout procedures.

5 - 11

Mark V / Mark V Plus Injection Systems


Notes:

5 - 12

CPU Card

CPU Card
There are two versions of the CPU Card, identified by the card revision level, part number, and serial number. Use the table below to
determine which card type the user has, then refer to the appropriate
description on the following pages.

Assembly No.

Revision

78101-10-AP-01 Rev. E and above


78101-10-AP-14 Rev. A and above

Serial Number

Card Type

Above 20000
Above 27467

Type B
Type C

6-1

Mark V / Mark V Plus Injection Systems

CPU Card Type B


(Part Number 78101-10-AP-01 (-3), serial numbers 20000 - 27467)
The CPU Card contains the main injector operating program. Refer to
the figure on page 6 - 3 for a block diagram of the CPU Card type B.
The CPU Card contains the following circuits:
CPU

The Z-80 CPU U10 is supported by 40 Kbytes of EPROM, and 8


Kbytes of RAM. This processor provides a 16-bit address bus, an 8-bit
data bus, and several control lines for Read/Write, Interrupts, etc..

Clock

Crystal Y2 (8 MHz) and clock generator chip U2, produce the 4 MHz
clock system for the CPU, and provide a Reset pulse when power is
first applied. This pulse resets the CPU, and ensures that the program starts at the beginning.

Memory

CPU memory is comprised of four EPROM /PROM chips (U11


through U15), and one RAM chip (U16). These chips connect the
address and data buses, and are controlled by the enable lines from
the memory / I/O decoder, and the Read/Write lines from the CPU. If
these chips need to be replaced, contact Medrad Service for current
revision EPROMS.

Memory /
Input/Output
Decoder

The Memory / Input/Output Decoder, comprised of U22 and U23, provides:


Control of the memory chips during read/write cycles
Two major decode lines (MEMIO1 and MEMIO2: Pins 16
and 17) that are buffered and sent to the Input/Output Card
Direction control for the data buffer

Bus Buffers

The control lines from the CPU are buffered by U17, then sent to the
motherboard bus. The address bus is buffered by U18 and U19, then
sent to the motherboard bus. The flow of data is controlled by bidirectional buffer U20, which is controlled by the Memory / I/O Decoder.
Control and addressing lines flow away from the CPU, while the buffered data bus, can flow in either direction.

Watchdog 1

The CPU watchdog (U3) must receive pulses from the I/O Card on the
WATCHDOG 1 line, or CPU operations will be interrupted. The pulses
are generated on the I/O Card, by decoding a CPU address. A loss of
these pulses is most likely the result of a problem with the CPU or the
EPROMs.

Test Section

The circuit surrounding U7 is used for in-house testing, and the


enabling of Utility programs.

6-2

CPU Card

Figure 6.1: Block Diagram: CPU Card Type B

6-3

Mark V / Mark V Plus Injection Systems

CPU Card Type C


(Part Number 78101-10-AP-14 (-3), serial numbers above 27467)
The CPU Card contains the main injector operating program. Refer to
the figure on page 6 - 5 for a block diagram of the CPU Card type C.
The CPU Card contains the following circuits:
CPU

The Z-80 CPU U10 is supported by 64 Kbytes of EPROM, and 8


Kbytes of RAM. This processor provides a 16-bit address bus, an 8-bit
data bus, and several control lines for Read/Write, Interrupts, etc..

Clock

Crystal Y2 (8 MHz) and clock generator chip U2, produce the 4 MHz
clock system for the CPU, and provide a Reset pulse when power is
first applied. This pulse resets the CPU, and ensures that the program starts at the beginning.

Memory

CPU memory is comprised of one EPROM / PROM chip (U24), and


one RAM chip (U16). These chips connect the address and data
buses, and are controlled by both the enable lines from the memory /
I/O decoder, and the Read/Write lines from the CPU. EPROM chip
U24 is only accessed when switch SP2-2 is set to the U24 position.
If this chip must be replaced, contact Medrad Service for a current
version EPROM. In addition to standard memory, a separate EPROM
chip (U25) may be installed to access special utility functions. This
may be accessed be setting switch SP2-2 to the U25 position. Contact Medrad Factory Service for more information.

Memory /
Input/Output
Decoder

The Memory / Input/Output Decoder, comprised of U23 and U26, provides:


Control of the memory chips during read/write cycles
Two major decode lines (MEMIO1 and MEMIO2: Pins 16
and 17) that are buffered and sent to the Input/Output Card
Direction control for the data buffer

Bus Buffers

The control lines from the CPU are buffered by U17, then sent to the
motherboard bus. The address bus is buffered by U18 and U19, then
sent to the motherboard bus. The flow of data is controlled by bidirectional buffer U20, which is controlled by the Memory / I/O Decoder.
Control and addressing lines flow away from the CPU, while the buffered data bus, can flow in either direction.

Watchdog 1

The CPU watchdog (U3) must receive pulses from the I/O Card on the
WATCHDOG 1 line, or CPU operations will be interrupted. The pulses
are generated on the I/O Card, by decoding a CPU address. A loss of
these pulses is most likely the result of a problem with the CPU or the
EPROMs.

Test Section

The circuit surrounding U7 is used for in-house testing, and the


enabling of Utility programs.

6-4

CPU Card

Figure 6.2: Block Diagram: CPU Card Type C

6-5

Mark V / Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Serial Number

Card Part Number

Chip
Designation

CPU 2XXXX to 27467

78101-10-AP-01 (-2, -3)

U11

MV 7.0 U11

U12

MV 7.0 U12

U13

MV 7.0 U13

U14

MV 7.0 U14

U15

MV ENG 7.0 U15 (English)

U15

MV GER 7.0 U15 (German)

U15

MV FR 7.0 U15 (French)

U22

M5JA22

U23

M5JA23

U24

MV ENG 7.0 U24 (English)

U24

MV GER 7.0 U24 (German)

U24

MV FR 7.0 U24 (French)

U23

M5JA23

U26

M5JA26

CPU 27468 and Above

78101-10-AP-14 (-3)

Chip Part Number

NOTE: Additional language configurations may be available.


Contact MEDRAD for additional information.

6-6

Input / Output Card

Input / Output Card


Through the I/O Card, the CPU:

reads Control Panel, external switches, and system event status

operates Control Panel displays and external connections

synchronizes and times the injection.

Refer to page 7 - 3 for a block diagram of the I/O Card.


Bus Buffers

The control bus is buffered by U14, and the address bus is buffered by
U15. The bidirectional data bus is buffered and controlled by U22, with
direction control from I/O decoder U8.

Display Decoder

Signals for the Control Panel Display Card are provided by 4-16 channel decoder U1, while U7 inserts display driver Wait States. These signals control the Sentinel and LED display drivers.

Display Buffers

Two address lines, and eight data lines, are buffered for the Display
Card by U16 and U19.

I/O Decoder

Decoder U8, controlled by address and control lines, provides an


enable to programmable I/O (PIO) chips U5 and U6, counter/timer chip
(CTC) U4, and, provides data direction control for data buffer U22.

Parallel
Input/Output Chips

Parallel I/O chips permit the CPU to access external inputs, and to control outputs.

PIO1 -- The inputs to U6 are the hand start switch, remote start
switch, and remote disarm input. Through the data buses, the CPU
can check the digital status of these inputs. Outputs from U6
include: The film changer relay enable, two injecting signals, Armed
signal, and Head Indicator signals. Through the I/O chip, the CPU
can turn these outputs on and off.

PIO2 -- This device (U5) is dedicated to decoding of the keypad on


the Control Panel. Port A (sense line) rotates a Logic-0 on each line
on the keypad matrix. When a key is pressed, one line of Port B will
go to Logic-0. The CPU compares Port A to Port B to determine
which key was pressed.
Port A lines A0 - A3:
Port A lines A4 - A7:

for the Main Keypad


for the ECG/Scope Keypad
7-1

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


Counter / Timer
Chip (CTC)

The CTC (U4) generates interrupt signals for the CPU. The interrupts
are prioritized and asynchronous with the system clock.

Trigger 0: (Not used with SYS 500-PI, or RMT 505-PI/510-PI) Rwave detector interrupt request. When an R-wave is detected, an
interrupt is generated. Trigger 0 has the highest priority and is
used only with the ECG option.

Trigger 1: PPI memory error interrupt request. PPI primary and


backup memories are compared each time primary memory is
read. If primary and backup data values are not equal, an interrupt
request is generated.

Trigger 2: UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver-Transmitter)


interrupt request. This indicates that the Remote Panel is requesting communication with the Main Unit.

Trigger 3: Timed Interrupt. This provides a real-time clock and


delay timer function. During an injection, this interrupt program
performs Flow Rate and Volume Limit calculations. This interrupt
is not externally triggered, but driven from the time divided clock
generator.

Test Decoder

This 4-16 channel decoder (U2) provides Reset pulses for Watchdog
1, and controls timing of the buzzer.

Test Section

The circuit surrounding U17 and U18 is for in-house testing.

ECG Detector

This circuitry is used only with the ECG option. The incoming R-wave
signal is sent to the multiplying DAC circuit (U20, U21, U23, and U24
or U20, U21, and U26), while sensitivity to this signal is controlled by
the Gain Up/Down keys on the ECG Keypad. Gain information is sent
through the data bus to U20, which sets a multiplication factor for DAC
U21. The output of the DAC is buffered (at U24 or U26A), then sent to
the R-wave detector U23 or U26B, of which output is a pulse that indicates an R-wave. This pulse goes through a pulse shaping network
(U25 or U27), then to CTC Trigger 0.

7-2

Input / Output Card

Figure 7.1: Block Diagram: I/O Card

7-3

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


NOTES:

7-4

Servo Control Card

Servo Control Card


The Servo Control Card (SCC) serves two primary functions:

Provide signals that control the Flow Rate and Power Drive
circuits

Read and interpret information from the head, to control


injection Flow Rate and Pressure [limit].

Refer to the figure on page 8 - 4 for a block diagram of the Servo Control Card.
Bus Buffers

The control bus is buffered by U12, and the address bus is buffered
by U11. The bi-directional data bus is buffered and controlled by U10,
with direction control coming from direction logic.

Direction Logic

Gates U7-U9 control the direction line of U10, controlling the flow of
data to and from the card.

A/D Converter

Analog-to-digital (A/D) converter U1 inputs a multiplexed analog signal, and converts it into a digital word. This process is controlled by
A/D converter logic (U4, U5) and DAC decoder U14. When requested
from the CPU, the converted 10-bit value is gated to the data bus by
tri-state buffers U2 and U3.

A/D Converter Logic

Gates U4 and U5 control the A/D converter U1, starting the A/D conversion when the data is ready, and enabling buffers U2 and U3 to
transfer the converted word to the data bus.

DAC Decoder

Decoder U14, with U18 and U6, provide enable signals for the DACs
(digital-to-analog converters) and the MUX (multiplexer). These
enables allow data bus information to be written to the device. The
decoder also provides signals for the A/D converter logic, direction
logic, and Reset pulses for WATCHDOG 2.

WATCHDOG 2

The DAC decoder sends pulses to WATCHDOG 2 (U15) when the


mechanical stop is in position, and Ready to Inject. If the Mechanical
Stop takes too long to move into position, the pulses from the DAC
decoder will stop, resulting in a disarm condition. The Sentinel will
then display the message Mechanical Stop Position Failure.

PIO3

The inputs to PIO3 (U16) are signals from the Injector Head, Power
Drive Circuit, and the analog portion of the SCC. These inputs
include: Turret switch position, 60 ml indication, and FWD/REV indication from the Injector Head, Aux Monitor from the PDC, and an Overpressure Limit signal from the SCC. The status of PIO3 inputs are
8-1

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


directed to the CPU through data busses. Outputs from PIO3 include:
Flow Control signals, the Safe Relay Enable, and the System Override signal.
System Monitor
Flip-Flop

The flip-flop (U17) sends alarm signals to disarm the injector, if any of
the following input conditions occur: WATCHDOG 2, OPLIM (overpressure signal), or AUX MONITOR (power drive failure).

Command, Position,
and Signal DACs

When enabled and timed by the DAC decoder U14, one of the DACs
(U21-U24) will read a byte of data bus information. The DAC then
converts the byte to an analog voltage between zero and 10 VDC.
DAC resolution is 40mV per count.

Pressure Limit Command DAC


The output of this DAC is the Pressure Limit Command signal
(PSILIM SELECTED). This signal is sent to the Multiplexer, the Primary Pressure Limit circuit, and the Overpressure Limit circuit.
Flow Rate Command DAC
The output of this DAC is the Flow Rate Command signal (FLOW
RATE SELECTED). This signal is sent to the Multiplexer, Flow Scale
Circuit and Power Drive Card (PDC, PDCP, or PDCI).
Mechanical Stop Position DAC
The output of this DAC is the Mechanical Stop Position signal
(MSPOSCMD). This signal is sent to the Multiplexer, and through
Unity Gain Buffer U26C, to the Mechanical Stop Drive Card.
Velocity Signal DAC
The output of this DAC is a digitized velocity signal, sent to the Imaging System Interface Card. This signal is buffered, becoming the Flow
Profile Signal available through connector J15, pin 4.
Multiplexer (MUX)

The multiplexer circuit is comprised of multiplexer U19, Quad latch


U20, and Unity-Gain buffer U26A. This circuit receives eight inputs,
and under timing control connects each input to the circuit output,
which is sent to the A/D converter.

TTL/CMOS Converter

U25 converts TTL logic (0/5V) to CMOS logic (0/15V).

10V Reference

Chip U28 develops +10 VDC as a reference voltage for the Plunger
and Mechanical Stop position feedback pots in the head. This voltage
is also applied to the multiplexer to be monitored by the CPU.

Pot Processor

This circuit, comprised of U27C and associated components, buffers


and filters the pot wiper signal. The pot signal is an input to the multiplexer and the error amplifier.

Primary Pressure
Limit Circuit

The Primary pressure limit circuit (U26B), compares the pressure limit
command to the actual pressure developed during an injection. The

8-2

Servo Control Card


output of this circuit is sent to three Pressure Limiting circuits to perform the following functions:

Flow Rate Integrator Circuit U29.


The output of U26B is summed with the Flow Rate command to effectively reduce the input voltage to U29. This action results in the reduction of the Flow Rate command signal, thereby preventing the
selected pressure limit from being exceeded.
Inverting amplifier, U27B.
The output of this amplifier is summed with the output of the Main
Flow Integrator, to reduce the voltage sent to the error amplifier U27D,
thereby decreasing the error signal.
Circuit Q4.
This circuit is driven to cut-off, sending a pressure limit indication signal (PRESLIMIND) to PIO3 (U16), and eventually to the CPU. This
PRESLIMIND signal will also send Q12 into a saturation state, which
shunts R81 and reduces the gain of the error amplifier, thereby
decreasing the error signal.
Overpressure Circuit

If the actual pressure exceeds the pressure limit command by greater


than 100-150 PSI, the Overpressure Circuit (U26D) forwards an
OPLIM signal to stop the injection.

Flow Scale Circuit

Using the two flow scale signals, circuits Q5, Q6, and Q11 attenuate
the flow rate selected signal during ML/MIN and ML/HR flow scale
injections.

Standby Reset Circuit

Driven by the INJECT signal, Q8, Q9, and Q10 control the flow rate
integrator, U29. During standby, the integrator follows the position pot.
The output of the integrator is equal in amplitude, and opposite in
polarity to the position pot. When an injection is to occur, this circuit
allows U29 to generate the position command.

Flow Rate Integrator

The master position command is generated by integrator U29. The


output of this circuit is a ramp, with a slope proportional to the input
signal (flow rate selected).

Error Amplifier

When the plunger is moving at the desired flow rate, the master position command from U29 and the pot wiper signal from U27C are equal
but opposite in polarity. The output of error amplifier U27D is the difference between these two signals, or the position error. This error
signal is used by the drive circuits to power the motor. If pressure limiting occurs, a signal from U27B reduces the error signal, and the gain
of U27D is reduced by Q12.

Feed Forward Circuit

This circuit, comprised of Q7 and U27A, provides a boost voltage to


the motor to compensate for the internal resistance of the motor. This
turning voltage varies with the Flow Rate.

8-3

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Figure 8.1: Block Diagram: Servo Control Card


8-4

PPI Card

PPI Card
There are two versions of the PPI Card, identified by the card revision
level and serial number. Use the chart below to identify card type, then
refer to the appropriate description on the following pages.

Revision
Revision B
Revision C and above

Serial Number
20000 - 25665
25665 and Above

PPI Card Type


Type B
Type C

9-1

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

PPI Card Type B


(Serial numbers 20000 to 25665)
For a block diagram of PPI Card type B, refer to page 9 - 3.
Bus Buffers

The control bus is buffered by U3, and the address bus is buffered by
U1 and U2. The bidirectional data bus is buffered by U4 and U5, with
direction defined by one of the lines on the control bus. These data
buffers are enabled by the decoder. The data bus for the primary
memory chip is controlled by U5; the backup memory chip data bus is
controlled by U4.

Decoder

Decoder U6 provides the enable lines for the data bus buffers, the
memory chips, and the RS-232C circuit.

PPI Memory

Primary PPI memory is provided by 8K RAM chip U9. Backup PPI


memory is provided by U8. The chips are enabled by signals from the
decoder, while outputs are enabled by lines from the control bus.

Memory Comparator

The data buses from the primary and backup memory are continuously compared by U7. If the values do not agree, latch U11 sends a
signal (MEMERRINT), enabling the CTC on the I/O Card, to interrupt
the processor.

Analog Switches

The enable lines for the memory chips are switched through U16.
When power is applied, the switches are closed, connecting the
enable lines. When power is removed or low, the switches are open,
disabling the enable lines to preserve power.

Power-Down and
Battery Circuit

When power is removed, or is low, Q1- Q3 disables U16 and opens


the analog switches to disable the memory chips to conserve power
as they switch over to battery power. The battery provides backup
power for the memory chips to preserve the contents when power is
removed.

RS-232C Circuit

This circuit consists of Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter


(UART) U13, baud rate clock U12, line receiver U15, and line driver
U14. With this circuit, the Main Unit can communicate with the
Remote Panel using an RS-232C serial interface.

9-2

PPI Card

Figure 9.1: Block Diagram: PPI Card Type B

9-3

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

PPI Card Type C


(Serial number 25665 and above)
For a block diagram of PPI Card type C, refer to page 9 - 5.
Bus Buffers

The control bus is buffered by U3, and the address bus is buffered by
U1 and U2. The bidirectional data bus is buffered by U4 and U5, with
direction defined by one of the lines on the control bus. These data
buffers are enabled by the decoder. The data bus for the primary
memory chip is controlled by U5; the backup memory chip data bus is
controlled by U4.

Decoder

Decoder U6 provides the enable lines for the data bus buffers, the
memory chips, and the RS-232C circuit.

PPI Memory

Primary PPI memory is provided by 8K RAM chip U9. Backup PPI


memory is provided by U8. The chips are enabled by signals from the
decoder, while outputs are enabled by lines from the control bus.

Memory Comparator

The data buses from the primary and backup memory are continuously compared by U7. If the values do not agree, latch U11 sends a
signal (MEMERRINT), enabling the CTC on the I/O Card, to interrupt
the processor.

Analog Switches

The enable lines for the memory chips are switched through U16.
When power is applied, the switches are closed, connecting the
enable lines. When power is removed or low, the switches are open,
disabling the enable lines to preserve power.

Power-Down and
Battery Circuit

When power is removed, or is low, Q1-Q3 disables U16 and opens


the analog switches to disable the memory chips to conserve power
as they switch over to battery power. The battery provides backup
power for the memory chips to preserve the contents when power is
removed.

RS-232C Circuit

This circuit consists of Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter


(UART) U13, baud rate clock U12, U19 RS-232 line driver and
receiver, and ferrite beads FB1-FB5 added for reduction of conducted
noise. With this circuit, the Main Unit can communicate with the
Remote Panel using an RS-232C serial interface.

Ferrite Beads

FB1-FB5 are used to suppress noise from the power source.


NOTE: Clearing of PPI Memory: Type C PPI Cards contain a
new feature for the simplification of clearing PPI memory. This can be accomplished by removing power,
then shorting pin 2 to pin 1 or 3 of JU1. The shorted
state should be maintained for several seconds to
ensure complete and proper clearing.

9-4

PPI Card

Figure 9.2: Block Diagram: PPI Card Type C

9-5

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


NOTES:

9-6

Control Panel

10 Control Panel
The Control panel is comprised of the keyboard overlay attached to
the Display Card. Three different types of interchangeable Display
Cards have been produced. Refer to page 10 - 2 for a block diagram
of the Control Panel cards.
Keyboard Overlay

The keyboard overlay contains snap-action membrane keys, interconnected in a matrix of four columns and eight rows. This matrix is connected to the Display Card, then to the I/O Card, where PIO2 senses
key closures for the system.

Display Card

The Display Card contains the alphanumeric displays and LEDs that
show through the keyboard overlay. These devices convey messages
and operating status to the operator. The Display Card contains the
Sentinel display, numeric displays, and LED displays.

Sentinel Display

The Sentinel is made up of eight, 4-character display units (DS1


through DS8), creating a 32-character read-out. These devices
receive data and control information from the I/O Card.

Numeric Display
Drivers and
Numeric Displays

Three display groups are used to display injection parameters on the


Control panel. Each display group consists of a display driver (U1, U2,
or U4), and numeric display units. Display drivers also receive the
data and control line information from the I/O Card. Group designations are as follows:
Display Driver U1, displays Volume (DS23 - DS26), Flow Rate (DS11,
DS12), and Rise/Fall (DS9, DS10).
Display Driver U2, displays Pressure [limit] (DS27 - DS30) and Injection Duration (DS13-DS15).
Display Driver U4, displays Program Number (DS16, DS17), Total
Levels (DS18), Level (DS22),and Delay (DS19-DS21).

LED Driver,
Transistor Driver
and LEDs

The remainder of the Display Card circuit controls and drives LEDs
used as backlights of various indicators on the Control panel. Display
driver U3 controls all LEDs, and receives data and control information
from the I/O Card. Each LED group contains drivers such as Q5 and
Q6, or IC U5. These three columns of LEDs are enabled by Q20
through Q22, and driven by Display Driver U3.

10 - 1

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Figure 10.1: Block Diagram: Control Panel

10 - 2

Power Drive Circuit

11

Power Drive Circuit


The Power Drive Circuit supplies, and controls power to the Injector
Head Plunger Motor.
The Power Drive Circuit is located primarily on the Power Drive Card.
The Safe relay, Reverse relay, and selected output stage components
are located elsewhere in the unit. The filter choke is mounted on the
chassis frame.
The information in this section describes three versions of the Power
Drive Card. Cards designated PDC are those with serial numbers
below 60000, those designated PDCP are serial number PDCP 60000
and above, and those designated PDCI are cards serial number PDCI
70000 and above. The following information describes the PDC Card,
while a circuit description for the PDCP Card can be found on Page 11 9, and for the PDCI Card on Page 11 - 17.
NOTE: The PDC Card cannot be used in Mark V Plus systems.
NOTE: The Power Drive Card International (PDCI) was redesigned to ensure compliance with IEC 601-1 electrical
standards, regarded as the worldwide electrical standard. A new power amplifier design coincides with the
release of the MKV Plus International Injection System.
The new International boards are identified by having an
I after the designated prefix (PDCI), and are not interchangeable with any predecessor.

11 - 1

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

PDC
(Serial numbers below 60000)
Refer to pages 11 - 7 and 11 - 8 for block diagrams of the PDC Card.
Brake Circuit
Q8, Q9, Q10

The Brake Circuit is used to stop the plunger motor at the end of an
injection, or if an error condition occurs during an injection. This process is called Dynamic Braking. When the Safe Relay opens, the
motor will continue to turn, thereby acting as a generator producing
voltage. When the brake is activated, the motor winding is connected
across two .75 ohm, 5 watt resistors, or one .68 ohm 2 watt resistor,
stopping the motor. At the end of an injection, the error signal
(ERRSIG, a command from the Servo Control Card) goes negative (1V), activating the Brake Sensing Circuit Q8 - Q10. A SYSTEM
OVERRIDE, AUX MONITOR, or overrate signal can also activate the
brake.

Overcurrent
Shutdown Circuit
U4B, DRC Q1
(Q11 on CPA)

The overcurrent shutdown circuit (U4B-C on PDC and Q1 on DRC


[Q11 on CPA]) opens the motor voltage path if excessive current is
flowing through the plunger motor circuit. The Sampling Resistor is in
series with the motor, and voltage across it is directly proportional to
current through the motor. This voltage is an input to Motor Current
Amplifier U4C, and to one input of the Overcurrent Shutdown comparator (U4B). The other input of U4B is tied to a voltage divider, to establish an overcurrent shutdown reference (approximately -6V). When
the output of U4C rises above this reference voltage, the output of
U4B reaches negative saturation. This voltage is applied to the Gate
of Overcurrent Shutdown FET Q1 on the DRC (Q11 on CPA), forcing it
into cut-off and opening the motor voltage path.

Safe Relay /
Safe Relay Enable
K1, Q5

Safe Relay K1 completes the motor voltage path between the SCR
Bridge stage, and the Plunger Motor. K1 also provides an additional
pair of normally-closed contacts to allow the Mechanical Stop Motor to
run while the injector is disarmed, yet prevent the Plunger motor from
running. K1 is enabled by a Forward or Reverse load command from
the injector head, or when the injector is armed (Safe Relay Enable
[SAFRELEN] from the SCC). In both cases, theses signals cause Q5
to conduct, providing a ground path to energize K1 (SAFRELO). This
action disables the Mechanical Stop Motor by breaking connections to
the motor, and allowing power to flow to the Plunger motor. The Safe
Relay is disabled by a SYSTEM OVERRIDE/AUX MONITOR from the
PDC, or a loss of the SAFRELEN from the SCC.

Reverse Relay
Enable Circuits
K2

When Reverse loading, both Safe Relay K1 and Reverse Relay K2,
must be energized. When REVERSE load is activated, +26 volts
energizes K2, reversing the polarity of the plunger motor.

11 - 2

Power Drive Circuit


System Override

The SYSTEM OVERRIDE shuts down the PDCP if the system detects
the presence of a System Monitor type condition (Overpressure,
Overvolume, or Overrate [via Aux Monitor]). When the SYSTEM
OVERRIDE signal from U16 (PIO 3) on the SCC goes high, the signal
is sent through D21 to: Disable the Safe Relay (R50, R82, Q4), activate the brake (D28, D25, Q10), and disable pulses to SCR bridge
controller (D28, R87, Q3). SYSTEM OVERRIDE and AUX MONITOR
are ORed on the PDC to form a redundant shut-down circuit.

Differential Amplifier
U1B

The Differential Amplifier (U1B) is used to establish a reference sine


wave for use by the zero crossing detector. Inputs to U1B are positive
half-waves taken from the secondary of Transformer T1, and halfwaves rectified by diodes in the SCR bridge Z1. The positive halfwaves coincide with both the positive and negative halves of the input
sine-wave. When the non-inverting input of U1B (pin 5) goes positive, the inverting input of U1B (pin 6) will be at or near zero volts. Output of U1B will go positive, producing the positive half of the sinewave. Likewise, when U1B pin 6 begins to go positive, the voltage at
U1B pin 5 will be at or near zero volts. The output of U1B will go negative, producing the negative half of the sine-wave. This action reestablishes the reference sine-wave.

Phase Shift Network


U1A

The Phase Shift Network is used to produce a sine-wave that is phase


shifted 0.4 mS ahead of the incoming sine-wave. This ensures that
sufficient voltage and current exist to fire the SCR bridge. Input to the
Phase Shift Amplifier, U1A, is the output of U1B. R6 adjusts the
amount of phase shift at the output of U1A.

Zero Crossing
Detector
U1C, U1D

The Zero Crossing Detector circuit will produce a positive going pulse
(-15v to 0), and reset the Ramp Generator circuit (U2A) when the
input sine-wave passes through zero. Input to this stage is the phase
shifted sine-wave from U1A. U1C and U1D function as a Window
Detector, each producing a positive output when input voltage is
within the established window. The non-inverting input to U1C has a
positive offset voltage, while the output of U1C goes to positive saturation when the inverting input voltage drops below the offset. The
inverting input of U1D also has a negative offset. Output of U1D will
go to negative saturation when voltage at the non-inverting input
drops below the offset. The outputs of U1C and U1D are ANDed by
D3-D4, and when both are positive, a positive going pulse is sent to
reset the Ramp Generator circuit.

Ramp Generator
Q1, U2A

Integrator U2A generates 2 volt (-2 to 0 volt) ramp waveforms


between each zero crossing. These ramps are used to establish a reference for the Trigger Comparator (U2D). During an injection, the
Error signal is summed with the ramps and applied to U2D. The Error
signal raises the DC reference level of the ramps. The integrator is
reset (zero crossing detector applies a positive going pulse to the gate
of Q1) when the sine-wave passes through zero.

11 - 3

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


Trigger Comparator,
SCR Controller
U2D

The Trigger Comparator (U2D) determines duration of pulses that fire


the SCR bridge. The input to U2D is the summed Error signal and
ramp wave-form. Duration of pulses is determined by the amount of
time that the input wave-form value is greater than zero volts. In
standby, input to U2D is 0 volts. The output of U2D is negative saturation. Diode D18 supplies a ground path for +15 volts across R38,
sending Q2 into cut-off.
During an injection, the Error signal raises the ramp wave-form above
zero volts. When ramp voltage is above zero, output of U2D switches
to positive saturation, reverse biasing D18, and removing the ground
path for the +15 volts. This voltage is applied to Q2 (through R38, D19
and D20), providing a ground path for +26 volts (through R12, R13,
and Q2), which creates a positive to negative transition on the primary
of pulse transformer T1. The pulse transformer will invert the polarity
of the secondary, creating a negative to positive pulse to fire the SCR
bridge. The duration of the pulse is determined by the amount of that
time the input to U2D is above zero volts.
Transistor Q3 is used to ground trigger pulses (remove base voltage
to Q2) if a SYSTEM OVERRIDE, AUX MONITOR, or overrate injection occurs.

Full Error Trigger


U2C

The Full Error Trigger will fire the SCR bridge if a large, instantaneous
Error signal does not allow U2D to trigger the SCR bridge. In order for
the Trigger Comparator (U2D) and the SCR Controller to fire the SCR
bridge, the output to U2D must be allowed to drop below zero. If the
Error signal is too large, input of U2D stays above zero, consequently
output is held in positive saturation. If this occurs, U2C will invert the
output of the zero crossing detector, and pulse the SCR Controller.
The pulses will continue until the Error signal drops to a value which
allows output of U2D to pulse normally, and resume firing of the SCR
bridge.

Delinearizing
Network

The circuit comprised of R80, R22-27, D7-8, and C16, increases drive
circuitry sensitivity to small error signals, and decreases sensitivity to
larger error signals.

Power Output Stage

AC power from the power transformer is applied to the SCR bridge


Z1. The output of the bridge, controlled by gate pulses from the SCR
controller, is filtered by L1 and C1 on the DRC, or L1 and C13 on the
CPA. The SCR bridge is protected by an MOV across the AC input.
The SCR Bridge output is protected by MOV Z2, while direction of
motor rotation is controlled by Reverse Relay K2. Motor current is
sampled for the pressure circuits and the overcurrent shutdown circuit
by Sampling Resistor R4 on the DRC (R57 in the CPA).

11 - 4

Power Drive Circuit


Elliptical Filter
U4D

The circuit surrounding U4D removes the fundamental ripple frequency and harmonic noise from the motor current signal. Output is
sent to the Pressure Amplifier.

Pressure Amplifier
U4A

The filtered motor current signal is amplified by U4A. Output is the


actual pressure signal PRESSIG, sent to the multiplexer and pressure
limit circuitry on the SCC Card. This signal is also used by the Loading
Pressure Limit Circuit on the same card.

Loading Pressure
Limit Control - Q6

During loading, if pressure exceeds 200 PSI, Q6 conducts to limit


loading rate and pressure.

Motor Current
Amplifier
U4C

U4C circuitry amplifies and inverts the motor current signal from sampling resistor R57, in series with the motor. Output of the current
amplifier is proportional to motor current. This signal is used by Velocity Amplifier U3B, Auxiliary Monitor U3A, and Overcurrent Shutdown
Circuit U4B.

Velocity Amplifier
U3B

The inputs to velocity amplifier U3B are motor voltage, and the current
signal from the current amplifier; these two signals are opposite in
polarity and added to obtain the output of U3B, an analog derivative of
actual velocity.

Overrate Detector
U3C

By comparing the actual velocity signal to the FLOW SELECTED


input, U3C detects when the velocity exceeds the flow command.
When this occurs, the output of U3C nullifies the input to U2D, stopping the trigger pulses to the SCR bridge. The output of U3C is sent to
U3D, activating the brake, and causing Q3 to conduct (shorting SCR
Trigger pulses to ground).

Brake Comparator
U3D

If the velocity exceeds the flow command, U3D activates brake Q10,
activates Q3 to cease firing of the SCRs, and triggers auxiliary monitor U3A.

Auxiliary Monitor
U3A

The AUX MONITOR indication is given if the output of Motor Current


Amplifier U4C is excessive or if Velocity Comparator U3C indicates
that the speed of the motor is greater than the selected flow rate command. When either of these conditions occur, Aux Monitor circuit U3A
sends a signal to three other circuits on the PDC. The AUX MONITOR
signal: Causes Q3 to conduct, thereby stopping the firing of the SCR
bridge; Causes Q4 to conduct, grounding the Safe Relay Enable
(SAFRELEN), thereby disabling the Safe Relay; Activates the Brake
FET, to stop the plunger motor. The AUX MONITOR signal is also sent
to U16 (PIO 3) on the SCC to interrupt the CPU and terminate the
injection.

11 - 5

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


Forward/Reverse
Loading Circuit
U2A, R28

The Forward/Reverse Loading circuit applies a fixed load profile voltage which is summed with the output of Ramp Generator U2A, to trigger the SCR bridge and produce a drive voltage for the plunger motor.
Slow acceleration during loading is provided by the charging action of
capacitor C9 and R30. Loading pressure and velocity limiting are controlled through Q6.
Forward/Reverse Loading:
When the Forward load button on the injector head is pressed, +26
volts is sent through voltage divider (R28, R29, R31, R42) to be
summed with the output of Ramp Generator U2A. If Reverse load is
pressed, the action is similar with these exceptions: Pressing Reverse
load also energizes Reverse Relay K2 to reverse the motor lead
polarity; +26 volts also passes through blocking diode D10 (prevents
Forward load from energizing K2).
Forward/Reverse Indication - Q12:
The Forward/Reverse Indication (FWD/REV IND) alerts the system
that either FORWARD or REVERSE load has been pressed. When
either button is pressed on the injector head, Q12 conducts sending
an active low FWD/REV IND to U16 (PIO 3) on the SCC, prompting
the system to withdraw the SAFRELEN.

11 - 6

Power Drive Circuit

* NOTE:

Blocks that appear within the dotted lines are not located on the PDC.

Figure 11.1:

Block Diagram: Power Drive Card (PDC)


and Associated Circuitry (sheet 1 of 2)

11 - 7

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Figure 11.2:

11 - 8

Block Diagram: Power Drive Card (PDC)


and Associated Circuitry (sheet 2 of 2)

Power Drive Circuit

PDCP
(Serial Numbers PDCP 60000 and above)
Refer to pages 11 - 15 and 11 - 16 for block diagrams of the PDCP.
NOTE: Although PDCP Cards may be used with a CPA chassis, all component references in this section refer to
use with DRC Cards only. Refer to the Reverse Relay
Enable description on Page 11 - 10 for use with the
CPA chassis.
Brake Circuit
Q1, Q2, Q3

The Brake Circuit is used to stop the plunger motor at the end of an
injection, or if an error condition occurs during the injection. This process is called Dynamic Braking. When the Safe Relay opens, the
motor will continue to turn, thereby acting as a generator producing
voltage. When the brake is activated, the motor winding is connected
across two .75 ohm, 5 watt resistors, stopping the motor. At the end of
an injection, the error signal (ERRSIG, a command from the Servo
Control Card) goes negative (-1V), activating the Brake Sensing Circuit Q1 - Q3, thus stopping the motor. Zener diode D1 protects Q1 by
limiting gate to source voltage to 15 volts. A SYSTEM OVERRIDE,
AUX MONITOR, or overrate condition can also activate the brake.

Overcurrent
Shutdown
U1A, DRC Q1

The Overcurrent Shutdown Circuit opens the plunger motor voltage


path if excessive current is flowing through the motor circuit. Sampling
Resistor R4 (on DRC) is in series with the motor, and voltage across it
is directly proportional to the current through the motor. This voltage is
an input to Motor Current Amplifier U1D, the output of which is applied
to the non-inverting input of Overcurrent Shutdown comparator U1A.
The inverting input to U1A is connected to a voltage divider, establishing an Overcurrent Shutdown reference. When output of U1D rises
above reference voltage at U1A, the output of U1A switches to negative saturation. This negative voltage is applied to the gate of Overcurrent Shutdown FET Q1 on the DRC, forcing it into cut-off, and opening
the motor voltage path.

Safe Relay /
Safe Relay Enable
K1, Q7

Safe Relay K1 completes the motor voltage path between the SCR
Bridge stage, and the Plunger Motor. K1 also provides an additional
pair of normally-closed contacts to allow the Mechanical Stop Motor to
run while the injector is disarmed, yet prevent the Plunger motor from
running. K1 is enabled by either a Forward or Reverse load command
from the injector head, or when the injector is armed (Safe Relay
Enable [SAFRELEN] from the SCC). In both cases, theses signals
cause Q5 to conduct, providing a ground path to energize K1
(SAFRELO). This action disables the Mechanical Stop Motor by
breaking connections to the motor, and allowing power to flow to the
Plunger motor. The Safe Relay is disabled by a SYSTEM OVERRIDE/
AUX MONITOR from the PDCP, or a loss of the SAFRELEN from the
SCC.

11 - 9

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


Single Button Disarm from Injector Head - When the injector is armed,
and the SAFRELEN in the active high state, Q12 conducts, shunting
R56. This process allows Single Button disarming of the injector
head. When the injector is armed, if any single button on the injector
head is pressed, the signal will go through either D15 or D16, then
R59 and Q12, making Q13 conduct. This produces an active low
FWD/REV IND (to the SCC Card), which prompts the system to withdraw the SAFRELEN.
Reverse Relay
Enable Circuits
K2, Q10, Q11

When Reverse loading, both Safe Relay K1 and Reverse Relay K2


must be energized. K2 reverses the polarity of the plunger. When
REVERSE load is pressed, Q11 and Q10 conduct, applying +26 volts
through on-board jumper JU1, energizing K2. JU1 must be set correctly to avoid: No Reverse, or; Latch in Reverse. See the tables
below for proper settings:

Motherboard Configuration
RMB-2 Motherboards
CMB 4XXXX
MBR Motherboards

JU1 Setting
2-3
1-2
1-2

Power Chassis Configuration


JU1 Setting
Non-DRC Style 20000 series (CPA)
1-2
DRC Style 20000 series (CRP)
2-3
DRC Style 60000 series (CRP)
1-2
System Override

The SYSTEM OVERRIDE shuts down the PDCP if the system detects
the presence of a System Monitor type condition (Overpressure,
Overvolume, or Overrate [via Aux Monitor]). When the SYSTEM
OVERRIDE signal from U16 (PIO3) on the SCC goes high, Q4 and
Q5 (PDCP) conduct, allowing +15 volts to: Disable the Safe Relay circuit (Q6), activate the brake (D2 and Q1), and disable pulses to the
SCR bridge controller (Q9). SYSTEM OVERRIDE and AUX MONITOR are ORed on the PDCP to form a redundant shut-down circuit.

Zero Crossing
Detector
U4A, U4D

The Zero Crossing Detector circuit establishes a timing reference for


triggering of the SCR bridge. This is done by producing a positive
pulse (-10v to +10v) which resets Ramp Generator U5C when the
input sine-wave passes through zero. These pulses are also applied
to Full Error Trigger Q9, through D6 and R30, to fire the SCR bridge
when needed.
Input to this circuit is the added, positive half-waves, from Power
Transformer T1, forming a full-wave input to U4A. U4A, an inverting
amplifier with a gain of 1/10, together with D30 and C15, form a peak
detector which produces an output voltage proportional to the incoming line voltage. This voltage sets the input reference for Window
Detector U4D, which produces a positive output pulse when the input
sine-wave is below the reference established by U4A (sine-wave
passes through zero). All other times, the output of U4D is negative

11 - 10

Power Drive Circuit


saturation. The positive pulse, applied to the gate of Q16, resets the
Ramp Generator. The pulse width is approximately 1.2 mS @ 60 Hz,
and 1.5 mS @ 50 Hz, and is clamped to +/-10 volts by zener diodes
D28 and D29 in the feedback loop of U4D.
Ramp Generator
U5C, Q16

Integrator U5C generates 2 volt (-2 to 0 volt) ramp waveforms


between each zero crossing that are used to establish a reference
level for Trigger Comparator U5B. DC level and amplitude of the
ramps are adjusted by R90 and R112, respectively. The integrator is
reset when the sine-wave passes through zero (U4D applies a positive pulse to the gate of Q16).

Trigger Comparator,
SCR Controller
U5B, Q8

Trigger Comparator U5B uses the summed Error, or load profile, signal and ramp wave-form to determine at what point in the sine-wave
the SCR bridge is fired. In standby, input to U5B is a negative voltage
(-2 to 0 volt integration from U5C), thus output of U2D is negative saturation, and Q8 is off.
During injection, or when forward or reverse loading, the DC signal
raises the ramp wave-form input to U5B above zero volts, causing
output of U5B to enter positive saturation, making Q8 conduct. Q8
provides a ground path for +26 volts (through R27, R28, and Q8),
which creates a positive to negative transition on the primary of pulse
transformer T1. The pulse transformer is connected, to invert the
polarity of the secondary, creating a negative to positive pulse to fire
the SCR bridge. The duration of the pulse is determined by C4, R28,
and the primary of T1.

Full Error Trigger


Q9

The Full Error Trigger will fire the SCR bridge if a large, instantaneous
Error signal does not allow U5B to trigger the SCR bridge. In order for
Trigger Comparator U5B and the SCR Controller to fire the SCR
bridge, input to U5B must be allowed to go below zero. If the Error signal is too large, input of U5B stays above zero, consequently, output is
held in positive saturation. When this occurs, positive pulses from
Zero Crossing Detector U4D will make Q9 conduct. This transition
momentarily resets SCR Controller Q8, to enable the next positive
output from U5B to fire the SCR bridge. Pulses will continue to reset
the SCR controller until the Error signal drops to a value which allows
U5B to take over.
Transistor Q9 is used to ground trigger pulses (remove base voltage
to Q8) if a SYSTEM OVERRIDE (D8 and D9), AUX MONITOR (D10
and D9), or overrate injection (D11 and D9) occurs.

Delinearizing
Network

The circuit comprised of R75, R87, R88, R107-110, D26, D27 and
C10, increases drive circuitry sensitivity to small error signals, and
decreases sensitivity to larger error signals.

11 - 11

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


Power Output Stage

AC power from the power transformer is applied to SCR bridge Z1.


The output of the bridge, controlled by gate pulses from the SCR controller, is filtered by C3 (on DRC). The SCR bridge is protected by an
internal MOV across the AC input. SCR Bridge output is spike protected by MOV Z2, while direction of motor rotation is controlled by
Reverse Relay K2. Motor current is sampled for the pressure circuits
and the Overcurrent Shutdown circuit by Sampling Resistor R4 on the
DRC.

Pressure Signal Filter


U1C

U1C is a non-inverting, low-pass filter that eliminates 50 and 60 Hz


oscillations from the Motor Current signal.

Pressure Amplifier
U1B

The filtered motor current signal is amplified by U1B. Output is the


actual pressure signal PRESSIG, sent to the multiplexer and pressure
limit circuitry on the SCC Card. This signal is also used on-card by the
Loading Pressure limit. Pressure Amp U1B, a non-inverting amplifier,
allows calibration of the Pressure signal. Low pressure is calibrated by
R83, which adjusts the input offset to U1B, while high pressure adjustment is calibrated by R17, which adjusts the gain of U1B.

Loading Pressure
Limit Control Circuit
Q15, Q17, U5D

If the output of U1B indicates pressure in excess of 200 PSI, Q15 and
Q17 conduct, summing a positive voltage with the negative load profile voltage (from U4C) to reduce the input to U5D. The lower input
reduces the error signal to U5B, thus limiting load rate and pressure.

Motor Current
Amplifier
U1D

U1D amplifies and inverts the motor current signal from the sampling
resistor, which is in series with the motor. Output of U1D is a negative
voltage, proportional to motor current. This signal is used by Velocity
Amplifier U2B, Auxiliary Monitor U2C, and Overcurrent Shutdown circuit U1A.

Velocity Amplifier
U2B

Inputs to velocity amplifier U2B are motor voltage, and current signal
from the motor current amplifier U1D; these two signals are opposite
in polarity, and added to obtain an analog derivative of actual velocity.
The output of U2B is negative, used by Overrate Detectors U2A and
U2D. Output is also used to control the speed of the motor when loading (U5D).

Overrate Detector
U2A

Overrate Detector U2A compares the actual velocity signal to the


FLOW SELECTED input, and will shut down the PDCP if velocity
exceeds the flow command. When this occurs, output of U2A nullifies
input to Trigger Comparator U5B, stopping trigger pulses to the SCR
bridge.

Brake Comparator
U2D

The output of U2A is also sent to Brake Comparator U2D. If Overrate


Detector U2A cannot adequately control the overate condition, U2D
will activate the Brake (Q1), trigger an Aux Monitor (U2C), and short
any remaining SCR bridge pulses to ground.

11 - 12

Power Drive Circuit


Auxiliary Monitor
U2C

The AUX MONITOR circuit will shut down the PDCP if either of the following conditions exist: Excessive current flowing through the motor;
Actual motor speed is greater than the selected flow rate. U2C, with
diode D14 in the feedback loop, acts as a latch circuit. When either
above stated conditions occurs, output of U2C goes positive, forward
biasing D14, and feeding positive voltage to the non-inverting input
(latching U2C positive). An AUX MONITOR will: Disable pulses to the
SCR bridge through D8, D9, and D10; Disable the Safe Relay Enable
(SAFRELEN) through Q6; Activate the brake through D8 and D2;
Send a signal to U16 (PIO3) on the SCC to interrupt the CPU and terminate the injection.
Excessive Motor Current:
The inverting input of U2C receives the motor current signal from
Motor Current Amplifier U1D. Normally, this input is used to decrease
the sensitivity of U2C at the beginning of an injection, thus preventing
false Aux Monitor indications caused by initial motor voltage and current requirements at the beginning of an injection. As motor current
increases, the inverting input goes negative (eventually to the point at
which U2C output becomes positive). When this occurs, U2C will
latch, shutting down the PDCP, sending a signal to U16 (PIO 3) on the
SCC (prompting the system to terminate the injection).
Excessive Motor Voltage:
The non-inverting input to U2C receives the output of Brake Comparator U2D. Input to U2D is Overrate Detector U2A which senses if motor
speed is greater than the selected Flow Rate. If an overrate is
detected by U2A, U2D will send +15 volts to the non-inverting input of
U2C, making its output positive. When this occurs, U2C will latch,
shutting down the PDCP, sending a signal to U16 (PIO 3) on the SCC
(prompting the system to terminate the injection).

Forward/Reverse
Loading Circuit
U3, U4B, U4C, U5D

The Forward/Reverse Loading circuit develops a load profile voltage


which is summed with the output of Ramp Generator U5C, to trigger
the SCR bridge and produce a drive voltage for the plunger motor.
Plunger pressure and velocity when loading are controlled by Error
Amplifier U5D. This loading circuit is compatible with both Mark V and
Mark V Plus Injector Heads, with a description for the operation of
both below:
Mark V Injector Head:
Forward or Reverse loading sends +26 volts input to the loading circuit (junction of R67 and R82). The circuitry of R67, R82, D20, D21,
and Q14, clamp the input voltage to U4C at +4.3 volts, simulating the
load profile developed on the original Mark V PDC. U4C generates a
negative load profile which is inverted by Error Amplifier U5D to produce an error signal. This error signal is summed with the Ramp Generator output to trigger the SCR bridge. Capacitor C16 provides the
slow start to simulate the original PDC.

11 - 13

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


Mark V Plus Injector Head:
Forward or Reverse loading sends a voltage that ranges from +7.912.9 volts (slow to fast). This voltage is sent to U4C (clamping by D20
not required), generating a negative load profile (-1.5 to -6.5) which is
inverted by Error Amplifier U5D to produce an error signal. This signal
is summed with the Ramp Generator output to trigger the SCR bridge.
Ten Volt Regulator U3 and Inverter U4B supply -10 volts to the input of
U4C. The summation of -10 volts and the load rate command voltage
at U4C, produce a 0 volt velocity command voltage in standby mode,
or when only one button is depressed on the injector head.
Fwd/Rev Loading
Error Amplifier
U5D

Error Amplifier U5D controls the plunger velocity and pressure limit
when forward or reverse loading. Below are descriptions of velocity
and pressure limit control.
Velocity Control:
U5D controls motor velocity by increasing or decreasing the error signal, based upon comparisons of the Load Profile (U4C), and inverted
Velocity signal (U2B and U5A). U4C produces a load profile voltage
that indicates the desired speed of the motor, while Velocity Amplifier
U2C produces an output voltage that represents the actual speed of
the motor. The Velocity signal is inverted by U5A, and summed with
the Load Profile at the inverting input to U5D.
If there is a negative difference (actual plunger rate is below the
desired plunger rate), U5D will increase the error signal, firing the
SCR bridge earlier in the sine-wave, producing more power for the
motor. Likewise, if there is a positive difference (actual plunger rate is
above the desired plunger rate), U5D will decrease the error signal,
firing the SCR bridge later in the sine-wave, producing less power for
the motor.
Pressure Limit Control:
If the output of U1B indicates pressure in excess of 200 PSI, Q15 and
Q17 conduct, summing a positive voltage with the negative load profile voltage (from U4C) to reduce the input to U5D. The lower input
reduces the error signal from U5B, thus limiting load rate and pressure.

11 - 14

Power Drive Circuit

*NOTE:

Blocks that appear within the dotted lines are not located on the PDCP.

Figure 11.3:

Block Diagram: Power Drive Card Plus (PDCP)


and Associated Circuitry (sheet 1 of 2)

11 - 15

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Figure 11.4:

11 - 16

Block Diagram: Power Drive Card Plus (PDCP)


and Associated Circuitry (sheet 2 of 2)

Power Drive Circuit

PDCI
(Serial Numbers PDCI 70000 and above)
Refer to pages 11 - 23 and 11 - 24 for block diagrams of the PDCP.

Brake Circuit
Q1, Q2, Q3

The Brake Circuit is used to stop the plunger motor at the end of an
injection, or if an error condition occurs during the injection. This process is called Dynamic Braking. When the Safe Relay opens, the
motor will continue to turn, thereby acting as a generator producing
voltage. When the brake is activated, the motor winding is connected
across two .75 ohm, 5 watt resistors, stopping the motor. At the end of
an injection, the error signal (ERRSIG, a command from the Servo
Control Card) goes negative (-1V), activating the Brake Sensing Circuit Q1 - Q3, thus stopping the motor. Zener diode D1 protects Q1 by
limiting gate to source voltage to 15 volts. A SYSTEM OVERRIDE,
AUX MONITOR, or overrate condition can also activate the brake.

Overcurrent
Shutdown
U1A, DRC Q1

The Overcurrent Shutdown Circuit opens the plunger motor voltage


path if excessive current is flowing through the motor circuit. Sampling
Resistor R4 (on DRCI) is in series with the motor, and voltage across
it is directly proportional to the current through the motor. This voltage
is an input to Motor Current Amplifier U1D, the output of which is
applied to the non-inverting input of Overcurrent Shutdown comparator U1A. The inverting input to U1A is connected to a voltage divider,
establishing an Overcurrent Shutdown reference. When output of
U1D rises above reference voltage at U1A, the output of U1A
switches to negative saturation. This negative voltage is applied to the
gate of Overcurrent Shutdown FET Q1 on the DRCI, forcing it into cutoff, and opening the motor voltage path.

Safe Relay /
Safe Relay Enable
K1, Q7

Safe Relay K1 completes the motor voltage path between the SCR
Bridge stage, and the Plunger Motor. K1 also provides an additional
pair of normally-closed contacts to allow the Mechanical Stop Motor to
run while the injector is disarmed, yet prevent the Plunger motor from
running. K1 is enabled by either a Forward or Reverse load command
from the injector head, or when the injector is armed (Safe Relay
Enable [SAFRELEN] from the SCC). In both cases, theses signals
cause Q5 to conduct, providing a ground path to energize K1
(SAFRELO). This action disables the Mechanical Stop Motor by
breaking connections to the motor, and allowing power to flow to the
Plunger motor. The Safe Relay is disabled by a SYSTEM OVERRIDE/
AUX MONITOR from the PDCI, or a loss of the SAFRELEN from the
SCC.
Single Button Disarm from Injector Head - When the injector is armed,
and the SAFRELEN in the active high state, Q12 conducts, shunting
R56. This process allows Single Button disarming of the injector

11 - 17

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


head. When the injector is armed, if any single button on the injector
head is pressed, the signal will go through either D15 or D16, then
R59 and Q12, making Q13 conduct. This produces an active low
FWD/REV IND (to the SCC Card), which prompts the system to withdraw the SAFRELEN.
Reverse Relay
Enable Circuits
K2, Q10, Q11

When Reverse loading, both Safe Relay K1 and Reverse Relay K2


must be energized. K2 reverses the polarity of the plunger. When
REVERSE load is pressed, Q11 and Q10 conduct, applying +26 volts
through on-board jumper JU1, energizing K2. JU1 must be set in position 1-2.

System Override

The SYSTEM OVERRIDE shuts down the PDCI if the system detects
the presence of a System Monitor type condition (Overpressure,
Overvolume, or Overrate [via Aux Monitor]). When the SYSTEM
OVERRIDE signal from U16 (PIO3) on the SCC goes high, Q4 and
Q5 (PDCI) conduct, allowing +15 volts to: Disable the Safe Relay circuit (Q6), activate the brake (D2 and Q1), and disable pulses to the
SCR bridge controller (Q9). SYSTEM OVERRIDE and AUX MONITOR are ORed on the PDCI to form a redundant shut-down circuit.

Zero Crossing
Detector
U4A, U4D

The Zero Crossing Detector circuit establishes a timing reference for


triggering of the SCR bridge. This is done by producing a positive
pulse (-10v to +10v) which resets Ramp Generator U5C when the
input sine-wave passes through zero. These pulses are also applied
to Full Error Trigger Q9, through D6 and R30, to fire the SCR bridge
when needed.
Input to this circuit is the added, positive half-waves, from the 36 VAC
created by a circuit on the Motherboard (MBRI), forming a full-wave
input to U4A. U4A, an inverting amplifier with a gain of 2.06, together
with D30 and C15, form a peak detector which produces an output
voltage proportional to the incoming line voltage. This voltage sets the
input reference for Window Detector U4D, which produces a positive
output pulse when the input sine-wave is below the reference established by U4A (sine-wave passes through zero). All other times, the
output of U4D is negative saturation. The positive pulse, applied to the
gate of Q16, resets the Ramp Generator. The pulse width is approximately 1.2 mS @ 60 Hz, and 1.5 mS @ 50 Hz, and is clamped to +/10 volts by zener diodes D28 and D29 in the feedback loop of U4D.

Ramp Generator
U5C, Q16

11 - 18

Integrator U5C generates 2 volt (-2 to 0 volt) ramp waveforms


between each zero crossing that are used to establish a reference
level for Trigger Comparator U5B. DC level and amplitude of the
ramps are adjusted by R90 and R112, respectively. The integrator is
reset when the sine-wave passes through zero (U4D applies a positive pulse to the gate of Q16).

Power Drive Circuit


Trigger Comparator,
SCR Controller
U5B, Q8

Trigger Comparator U5B uses the summed Error, or load profile, signal and ramp wave-form to determine at what point in the sine-wave
the SCR bridge is fired. In standby, input to U5B is a negative voltage
(-2 to 0 volt integration from U5C), thus output of U2D is negative saturation, and Q8 is off.
During injection, or when forward or reverse loading, the DC signal
raises the ramp wave-form input to U5B above zero volts, causing
output of U5B to enter positive saturation, making Q8 conduct. Q8
provides a ground path for +26 volts (through R27, R28, and Q8),
which creates a positive to negative transition on the primary of pulse
transformer T1. The pulse transformer is connected, to invert the
polarity of the secondary, creating a negative to positive pulse to fire
the SCR bridge. The duration of the pulse is determined by C4, R28,
and the primary of T1.

Full Error Trigger


Q9

The Full Error Trigger will fire the SCR bridge if a large, instantaneous
Error signal does not allow U5B to trigger the SCR bridge. In order for
Trigger Comparator U5B and the SCR Controller to fire the SCR
bridge, input to U5B must be allowed to go below zero. If the Error signal is too large, input of U5B stays above zero, consequently, output
is held in positive saturation. When this occurs, positive pulses from
Zero Crossing Detector U4D will make Q9 conduct. This transition
momentarily resets SCR Controller Q8, to enable the next positive
output from U5B to fire the SCR bridge. Pulses will continue to reset
the SCR controller until the Error signal drops to a value which allows
U5B to take over.
Transistor Q9 is used to ground trigger pulses (remove base voltage
to Q8) if a SYSTEM OVERRIDE (D8 and D9), AUX MONITOR (D10
and D9), or overrate injection (D11 and D9) occurs.

Delinearizing
Network

The circuit comprised of R75, R87, R88, R107-110, D26, D27 and
C10, increases drive circuitry sensitivity to small error signals, and
decreases sensitivity to larger error signals.

Power Output Stage

AC power from the power transformer is applied to SCR bridge Z1.


The output of the bridge, controlled by gate pulses from the SCR controller, is filtered by C3 (on DRCI). The SCR bridge is protected by an
internal MOV across the AC input. SCR Bridge output is spike protected by MOV Z2, while direction of motor rotation is controlled by
Reverse Relay K2. Motor current is sampled for the pressure circuits
and the Overcurrent Shutdown circuit by Sampling Resistor R4 on the
DRCI.

Pressure Signal Filter


U1C

U1C is a non-inverting, low-pass filter that eliminates 50 and 60 Hz


oscillations from the Motor Current signal.

11 - 19

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


Pressure Amplifier
U1B

The filtered motor current signal is amplified by U1B. Output is the


actual pressure signal PRESSIG, sent to the multiplexer and pressure
limit circuitry on the SCC Card. This signal is also used on-card by the
Loading Pressure limit. Pressure Amp U1B, a non-inverting amplifier,
allows calibration of the Pressure signal. Low pressure is calibrated by
R83, which adjusts the input offset to U1B, while high pressure adjustment is calibrated by R17, which adjusts the gain of U1B.

Loading Pressure
Limit Control Circuit
Q15, Q17, U5D

If the output of U1B indicates pressure in excess of 200 PSI, Q15 and
Q17 conduct, summing a positive voltage with the negative load profile voltage (from U4C) to reduce the input to U5D. The lower input
reduces the error signal to U5B, thus limiting load rate and pressure.

Motor Current
Amplifier
U1D

U1D amplifies and inverts the motor current signal from the sampling
resistor, which is in series with the motor. Output of U1D is a negative
voltage, proportional to motor current. This signal is used by Velocity
Amplifier U2B, Auxiliary Monitor U2C, and Overcurrent Shutdown circuit U1A.

Velocity Amplifier
U2B

Inputs to velocity amplifier U2B are motor voltage, and current signal
from the motor current amplifier U1D; these two signals are opposite
in polarity, and added to obtain an analog derivative of actual velocity.
The output of U2B is negative, used by Overrate Detectors U2A and
U2D. Output is also used to control the speed of the motor when loading (U5D).

Overrate Detector
U2A

Overrate Detector U2A compares the actual velocity signal to the


FLOW SELECTED input, and will shut down the PDCI if velocity
exceeds the flow command. When this occurs, output of U2A nullifies
input to Trigger Comparator U5B, stopping trigger pulses to the SCR
bridge.

Brake Comparator
U2D

The output of U2A is also sent to Brake Comparator U2D. If Overrate


Detector U2A cannot adequately control the overate condition, U2D
will activate the Brake (Q1), trigger an Aux Monitor (U2C), and short
any remaining SCR bridge pulses to ground.

11 - 20

Power Drive Circuit


Auxiliary Monitor
U2C

The AUX MONITOR circuit will shut down the PDCI if either of the following conditions exist: Excessive current flowing through the motor;
Actual motor speed is greater than the selected flow rate. U2C, with
diode D14 in the feedback loop, acts as a latch circuit. When either
above stated conditions occurs, output of U2C goes positive, forward
biasing D14, and feeding positive voltage to the non-inverting input
(latching U2C positive). An AUX MONITOR will: Disable pulses to the
SCR bridge through D8, D9, and D10; Disable the Safe Relay Enable
(SAFRELEN) through Q6; Activate the brake through D8 and D2;
Send a signal to U16 (PIO3) on the SCC to interrupt the CPU and terminate the injection.
Excessive Motor Current:
The inverting input of U2C receives the motor current signal from
Motor Current Amplifier U1D. Normally, this input is used to decrease
the sensitivity of U2C at the beginning of an injection, thus preventing
false Aux Monitor indications caused by initial motor voltage and current requirements at the beginning of an injection. As motor current
increases, the inverting input goes negative (eventually to the point at
which U2C output becomes positive). When this occurs, U2C will
latch, shutting down the PDCI, sending a signal to U16 (PIO3) on the
SCC (prompting the system to terminate the injection).
Excessive Motor Voltage:
The non-inverting input to U2C receives the output of Brake Comparator U2D. Input to U2D is Overrate Detector U2A which senses if motor
speed is greater than the selected Flow Rate. If an overrate is
detected by U2A, U2D will send +15 volts to the non-inverting input of
U2C, making its output positive. When this occurs, U2C will latch,
shutting down the PDCI, sending a signal to U16 (PIO3) on the SCC
(prompting the system to terminate the injection).

Forward/Reverse
Loading Circuit
U3, U4B, U4C, U5D

The Forward/Reverse Loading circuit develops a load profile voltage


which is summed with the output of Ramp Generator U5C, to trigger
the SCR bridge and produce a drive voltage for the plunger motor.
Plunger pressure and velocity when loading are controlled by Error
Amplifier U5D. This loading circuit is compatible with both Mark V and
Mark V Plus Injector Heads, with a description for the operation of
both below:
Mark V Injector Head:
Forward or Reverse loading sends +26 volts input to the loading circuit (junction of R67 and R82). The circuitry of R67, R82, D20, D21,
and Q14, clamp the input voltage to U4C at +4.3 volts, simulating the
load profile developed on the original Mark V PDC. U4C generates a
negative load profile which is inverted by Error Amplifier U5D to produce an error signal. This error signal is summed with the Ramp Generator output to trigger the SCR bridge. Capacitor C16 provides the
slow start to simulate the original PDC.

11 - 21

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


Mark V Plus Injector Head:
Forward or Reverse loading sends a voltage that ranges from +7.912.9 volts (slow to fast). This voltage is sent to U4C (clamping by D20
not required), generating a negative load profile (-1.5 to -6.5) which is
inverted by Error Amplifier U5D to produce an error signal. This signal
is summed with the Ramp Generator output to trigger the SCR bridge.
Ten Volt Regulator U3 and Inverter U4B supply -10 volts to the input
of U4C. The summation of -10 volts and the load rate command voltage at U4C, produce a 0 volt velocity command voltage in standby
mode, or when only one button is depressed on the injector head.
Fwd/Rev Loading
Error Amplifier
U5D

Error Amplifier U5D controls the plunger velocity and pressure limit
when forward or reverse loading. Below are descriptions of velocity
and pressure limit control.
Velocity Control:
U5D controls motor velocity by increasing or decreasing the error signal, based upon comparisons of the Load Profile (U4C), and inverted
Velocity signal (U2B and U5A). U4C produces a load profile voltage
that indicates the desired speed of the motor, while Velocity Amplifier
U2C produces an output voltage that represents the actual speed of
the motor. The Velocity signal is inverted by U5A, and summed with
the Load Profile at the inverting input to U5D.
If there is a negative difference (actual plunger rate is below the
desired plunger rate), U5D will increase the error signal, firing the
SCR bridge earlier in the sine-wave, producing more power for the
motor. Likewise, if there is a positive difference (actual plunger rate is
above the desired plunger rate), U5D will decrease the error signal,
firing the SCR bridge later in the sine-wave, producing less power for
the motor.
Pressure Limit Control:
If the output of U1B indicates pressure in excess of 200 PSI, Q15 and
Q17 conduct, summing a positive voltage with the negative load profile voltage (from U4C) to reduce the input to U5D. The lower input
reduces the error signal from U5B, thus limiting load rate and pressure.

11 - 22

Power Drive Circuit

Figure 11.5:

Block Diagram:
Power Drive Card International (PDCI)
and Associated Circuitry (sheet 1 of 2)

11 - 23

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Figure 11.6:

11 - 24

Block Diagram:
Power Drive Card International (PDCI)
and Associated Circuitry (sheet 2 of 2)

Mechanical Stop Drive Card

12

Mechanical Stop
Drive Card
Refer to page 12 - 2 for a block diagram of the Mechanical Stop Drive
Card.

Differential Amplifier

The inputs to differential amp U2A are: Mechanical Stop Position


Command (BMSPOSCMD) and the Mechanical Stop signal (MSPOS)
from the Mechanical Stop Pot in the Injector Head. BMSPOSCMD
input represents the desired position of the Mechanical Stop. MSPOS
input represents actual position of the Mechanical Stop. The output of
U2A will be near zero volts when the Mechanical Stop is in position,
and will swing positive or negative when there is a difference between
BMSPOSCMD and MSPOS.

Absolute Value
Amplifier

Regardless of the polarity of the signal from U2A, the absolute value
circuit surrounding U2B provides a positive error signal to comparator U2C.

Comparator

One input to comparator U2C is a triangular waveform (generated by


U2D), the other, an error signal from U2B. U2C compares these
inputs, generating a pulse train which actuates drive transistor Q4.
The width of the pulses, which determine the duty cycle for Q4, vary
proportionally to the amplitude of the error signal from U2B.

Drive Transistor

Motor power is controlled by Q4, through the contacts of relay K1.

Direction Relay
Control Circuit

(Card revision D and below)


Relay K1 determines the polarity of the voltage applied to the motor. If
output of differential amplifier U2A is negative (meaning that the stop
should move back), Q7 energizes K1 and reverses motor direction.

Direction Relay
Control Circuit

(Card Revision E and above)


Relay K1 determines the polarity of the voltage applied to the motor.
The output of U2A is sent to the non-inverting input of U3, a high gain
comparator circuit. A comparator will switch between positive and
negative saturation, depending upon the polarity at the input. A hysteresis circuit provides positive feedback through R37 to prevent the
output of U3 from switching when the input is near 0 volts.
The output of U3 is then sent to Q7, a 2N3906 transistor that determines the directional control for the Mechanical Stop motor by switching K1 on the MSD card. When Q7 is OFF (output of U3 is at positive
saturation), the Mechanical Stop will move toward the rear of the
injector head (when the injector is armed). When Q7 is ON (output of

12 - 1

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


U3 is at negative saturation), the Mechanical Stop will move toward
the front of the injector head (when the injection is complete).
Triangular Ramp
Generator

A triangular waveform is generated on the U2D non-inverting input.

Overcurrent
Shutdown Circuit

If excessive current flows through sampling resistor R32, the voltage


developed activates Q5 and Q6, triggering one-shot U1, and disabling
ramp generator U2D.

Switched -26 VDC

A pair of normally-closed contacts on the Safe Relay complete the


path for -26 VDC to the Mechanical Stop Drive Card, which enables
the motor to run while the injector is disarmed. When the injector is
armed and the system has determined that the Mechanical Stop is in
position, the Safe Relay is energized and the contacts are opened to
the MSD Card, removing -26 VDC, which disables the motor.

Injector Head
Indicators

The armed light (L1) on the head is controlled by Q1. Indicators for
syringe size, and plunger position (appearing on the Mark V H5S
head only), are controlled by Q2 and Q3. Control signals for these
indicators originate at the 150/200 Enable on the I/O Card.

Figure 12.1: Block Diagram: Mechanical Stop Drive Card

12 - 2

Power Supply Card

13

Power Supply Card


The Power Supply Card supplies all low voltage power (26V and
below) to the injector system. Two versions of the Power Supply Card
were produced. Version PSC, with serial numbers below 40000, is
board part number 78101-07-AP-01. Version PSP, with serial numbers
40000 and above, is board part number 78101-07-AP-03 (required in
-I units). Both of these boards are interchangeable for non -I units.
Refer to page 13 - 2 for a block diagram of the Power Supply Card.

+26 VDC and -26 VDC


Supply

One winding on the power transformer supplies fused 36 VAC to


bridge rectifier Z1. The center tap of the 36 VAC winding is ground.
Bipolar bridge output is filtered for +26 VDC, while outputs from Z1
are +26 VDC and -26 VDC. Both supplies are filtered before being
used to develop other voltages.

+15 VDC and -15 VDC


Supply

The +26 VDC supply is regulated to +15 VDC by U2, voltage is filtered
by C12. The -26 VDC supply is regulated to -15 VDC by U3, voltage is
filtered by C15.

+5 VDC
Regulator Circuit

The +26 VDC supply is filtered then regulated to +5 VDC using Pulse
Width Modulator (PWM) U1 to switch a portion of the +26 VDC supply
through FET Q4. Pins 11 and 14 of U1, will pulse low then high, at a
frequency determined by R13, R14, and C8 (approximately 330 KHz).
The pulses are ORed through D3 and D4, and applied to Q3 and Q5,
which will pulse the gate of FET Q4. Zener diode D2 protects Q4 by
limiting the gate to source voltage to a maximum of 15 volts. The output of Q4 is filtered by inductor L1, capacitors C1 - C3, and load resistor R1.
Regulation of the +5 VDC supply is through the PWM IC and support
circuitry. Resistors R19 and R20 set up reference at U1 pin 2. The +5
VDC is coupled back to U1 pin 1, through a voltage divider network of
R16 and R18. The two voltages are compared to determine pulse
width at U1 pins 11 and 14. If the voltage is low, pulse width is lengthened to increase voltage; if voltage is high, pulse width is shortened to
decrease voltage.

+5 VDC Overcurrent
Protection

The +5 VDC supply has overcurrent protection circuitry will shut down
the PWM IC (and +5 VDC circuit) if current exceeds 6-8 amperes. If
voltage across sampling resistor R2 exceeds a certain value, Q1 and
Q2 conduct, switching power to U1 pin 10 (Shut Down), which stops
pulses at pins 11 and 14. The PWM IC will restart and restore +5 VDC
if the overcurrent condition is eliminated.
13 - 1

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


+5 VDC Overvoltage
Protection

+5 VDC overvoltage protection is provided by 6.2 VDC zener diode


D6, and 3 amp picofuse F3 (on PSC), or 3.15 amp fuse F6 (on PSP).
If the supply rises above +5 VDC, D6 begins to conduct and draw current. If voltage continues to rise, D6 will breakdown and short the +5
VDC supply to ground. The combination of voltage and current drawn
when D6 shorts, will trigger F3 (on PSC) or F6 (on PSP) to open,
removing the +26 VDC from the PWM.

Figure 13.1: Block Diagram: Power Supply Card

13 - 2

Injector Head

14

Injector Head
This section describes the components and circuitry in the Mark V and
Mark V Plus Injector Heads. Most areas are common to both injector
heads, with those not common, so noted. The following is a summary
of the primary injector head components:

Injector Head Body


Houses the drive and feedback systems for the syringe piston and
automatic mechanical stop.
Syringe Heater
Fits on pressure jacket; Maintains syringe fluid temperature at approximately 98.60 F (370 C).
Injector Head Scale Overlay/Plate
Contains the forward and reverse load controls and indicators that
show armed status, selected syringe size, piston position / Volume
Remaining, and Mechanical Stop position/status.
Turret Sensing Circuit and Limit Switches
Provide indication signals to the console if the turret is out of position,
or the Mechanical Stop is in contact with the Ball Nut Plate.
Head Cable
Connects to the rear of the Main Unit through a screw-on ring type
connector at J21. The Head Cable carries the drive voltages and
other signals which control Injector Head functions. Internal connector(s) aid in cable replacement.

14 - 1

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


Drive Systems

There are two motors and drive systems in the injector head: The
Syringe piston, and Automatic Mechanical Stop. The piston motor
(M1), is larger than the Mechanical Stop motor (M2). Both motors
incorporate belt drives for smooth, quiet operation.
Rotary motion of the piston motor (M1) is converted to linear motion
by a ballscrew. The Mechanical Stop Motor (M2), drives two acme
screws, one on each side of the piston. These acme screws move the
Mechanical Stop Plate between the ball nut plate and the front of the
head. The function of this drive system is to position the Mechanical
Stop as an over-volume prevention backup.

Feedback Pots

There are two independent feedback pots in the injector head which
share a common reference voltage. R1 monitors plunger position, and
R2 monitors Mechanical Stop position.

The wiper voltage from R1 is sent to the SCC, then buffered and filtered to derive the plunger position signal. This
signal represents the actual plunger position.

The wiper voltage from R2 is sent to the Mechanical Stop


Drive Card and the SCC, representing the actual Mechanical Stop position.

NOTE: On injector heads manufactured prior to 1992, R1 was


a 10K single pot. In order to improve reliability, R1 was
changed to a dual 20K pot, tied in parallel. These pots
are interchangeable but require different mounting
brackets.

Syringe Heater

The syringe heater is used to maintain the temperature of contrast


media in the syringe. Syringe heater temperature is maintained
through thermostats, and an over-temperature sensor/indicator in the
pod. Syringe heater supply voltage (+26 VDC) comes from the power
supply. A 2-pin connector allows quick replacement.
NOTES:
Some Syringe Heater cables contain a third (red) wire. This wire is
unused, and has been eliminated in new series syringe heaters,
designated by date codes 9029 and above.

14 - 2

The Mark V system syringe heater is similar in appearance only to


the Mark IV system syringe heater. The voltage requirement for
the Mark V syringe heater is +26 VDC, while that of the Mark IV
syringe heater is 36 VAC. The syringe heaters are not interchangeable.

Syringe heaters for all Mark V and MCT Systems are interchangeable.

Injector Head

Mark V Injector Head


Armed Light

Armed Light L1 receives ground through Q1 on the Mechanical Stop


Drive Card. The command for armed indication originates on the I/O
Card. As with the syringe heater and the limit switches, the Armed
Light uses the +26 VDC supply. When the injector is armed, with the
Mechanical Stop in position, Q1 receives pulses from the I/O Card,
causing the transistor to switch on and off, making L1 flash. When the
handswitch is pressed, input to Q1 is +5 VDC, putting Q1 in saturation
and completing the ground path for L1 (keeping the Armed light lit
continuously). Upon injection completion, input to Q1 will either go to
0 VDC (Single Arm), or receive pulses (MULTI Arm).

Position and
Syringe Size
Indicators

Plunger position is indicated by triangle-shaped LEDs DS1 and DS2,


attached to the Ball Nut Plate. Backlight LED LP2 and Plunger indicator DS2, indicate a selected 200 ml syringe size. Backlight LED LP1
and plunger indicator DS1 indicate a selected 150 ml syringe size.
The syringe size indicators are mounted on a fixed card below the
injector head control panel.
Both syringe size and position indicators are controlled by the MSD
Card, with inputs from the I/O Card.

Forward/Reverse
Load Circuit

The forward or reverse load membrane switches allow piston movement without engaging the normal injection circuitry. These controls
send a fixed voltage to the drive circuit on the PDCP/PDCI. The turret
must be in the locked position when loading. When FORWARD load
is pressed, +26 volts is switched directly through the load switch and
applied to the PDC drive circuit. When REVERSE load is pressed,
+26 volts is switched through transistor Q1 on the ICC and applied to
the drive circuit and Reverse relay K2. Pressing either load switch
when the injector is armed or injecting will disarm the injector.

Mechanical Stop
Position Indicator

The Mechanical Stop Position Indicator is a bar-shaped LED that


shows the position of the Mechanical Stop. The LED is mounted on a
T-shaped card, and attached to the Mechanical Stop Plate. The
Mechanical Stop Position Indicator receives +5VDC and ground,
through the Head Cable, therefore, is lit regardless of the syringe size
selected.

Turret and
Mechanical Stop
Limit Switches

There are two limit switches in the Injector Head. The turret limit
switch is normally closed, and indicates when the turret is out of injection position. The Mechanical Stop limit switch is normally closed, and
indicates when the Mechanical Stop Plate is in contact with the Ball
Nut Plate. The switches are connected in series to complete the path
to PIO3 on the Servo Control Card (TURLIMSW). If either switch is
disturbed, TURLIMSW goes to 0VDC, and the injector cannot be
armed.

14 - 3

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


Interconnect Card
(ICC)

The first circuit on the ICC is designed to prevent the Mechanical Stop
and Piston Plates from colliding when power is applied, by disabling
the Mechanical Stop motor when the piston is in the full forward position. The Mechanical Stop motor voltage path goes through a normally closed contact at relay K1 on the ICC Card. K1 is controlled by
comparator U1, which receives inputs from the plunger position
potentiometer, and a voltage divider network that establishes a reference for the comparator. Reference for non-inverting input of U1 (pin
2), is +9.35 VDC, set up by R3 and R4, with +10 VDC from the SCC
as the source and POT LOW as ground. Normally, pin 2 of U1 has a
voltage greater than that of pin 3, therefore, output of U1 (pin 6) is
positive saturation, which keeps K1 de-energized. As the piston
moves forward, either by injection or forward load, voltage at the
inverting input of U1 (pin 3) increases. When voltage at pin 3 of U1 is
equal to that at pin 2, output switches to negative saturation, and
energizes K1. The normally closed contacts open, and the voltage
path to the Mechanical Stop motor is broken.
The second circuit on the ICC eliminates direct switching of the +26
VDC supply for the Reverse Relay, through the Reverse Load switch.
The Reverse Relay electrically reverses polarity of the piston motor,
and is energized when the Reverse Load button is pressed. +26 VDC
is supplied to the collector of transistor Q1. When Reverse Load is
activated, Q1 saturates, and acting like a closed switch, sends +26
VDC to the Reverse Relay. This circuit is only used for Reverse, due
to the current requirements to directly energize the Reverse Relay.

14 - 4

Injector Head

Figure 14.1: Block Diagram: Head Card A, HCP

14 - 5

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Mark V Plus Injector Head


Cards labeled:
78101-13-AP-01 (HCP) ,78101-15-AP-01 (H5D), and 3002033 (H5D)
Forward/Reverse/
Enable Circuit

This circuit provides variable forward and reverse load speed control,
using a soft pot which varies voltage applied to the PDCP/PDCI load
circuit. A soft pot is a flat, membrane-type potentiometer, that alters
resistance according to what point on the potentiometer is pressed.
The ENABLE button is a safeguard against accidental loading if either
the forward or reverse load button should fail in the closed position.

Forward/Reverse Loading:
When ENABLE is pressed, +15 volts is supplied to one side of the soft
pot; the other is connected to a voltage divider (referenced at 8.5
volts) through Q2. When both FORWARD and ENABLE are pressed,
soft pot wiper voltage is sent to RN1, then to transistor Q3. Q3 functions as a emitter follower, to buffer the forward load command, before
it is sent to the PDCP/PDCI. When REVERSE and ENABLE are
pressed, soft pot wiper voltage is sent to RN1, then to transistor Q5.
Q5 also functions as a emitter follower, buffering the reverse load
(REV) command before it is sent to the PDCP/PDCI. The voltage
range of the Forward or Reverse load command is +9.1 to 15 volts
(slow to fast).
If both Forward and Reverse load are pressed, there is no piston
movement. The non-inverting inputs of U2A and U2D are referenced
at +7 volts by voltage dividers R1, R4, and R3. The outputs are positive, and do not effect normal loading. When both load buttons are
pressed (assuming Enable is also pressed), both inverting inputs (of
U2A and U2D) will have a greater positive value than the reference
voltage (+9.1 volts minimum), causing outputs to go to zero. This
makes Z2 and Z6 (5.1 volt zener diodes) conduct, clamping the load
voltage sent to the PDCP/PDCI (junctions of Z2/Q3 and Z6/Q5) at
+5.1 volts. This low amplitude is not sufficient to drive the piston
motor, and will therefore disarm the injector.

Timed Enable Button:


Timed Enable is designed to allow the operator to move the plunger
piston forward or reverse by using the Forward/Reverse softpots only
after the ENABLE button is depressed. In a no load condition, the
Enable input is at +5V. Zener diode Z1 keeps the Enable LED off until
the ENABLE button is pressed.
When the ENABLE button is pressed, the Enable input (J71, pin 8)
goes to +15V at the junction of Z1 and C3. This input provides two
functions. First, the Enable LED Indicator receives positive voltage
through Z1 and R8, causing it to illuminate. Second, +15V is applied
to the junction of C3 and RN1/RN2, producing a positive pulse. The
positive pulse is applied to the inverting input of U2A pin 6, switching
the output to negative. This negative output is applied to the trigger
14 - 6

Injector Head
input of U1 pin 2, producing a positive pulse for U2B. Pulse duration is
approximately 5 seconds. This pulse, applied to U2B pin 4, causes
the output of U2B to switch negative. Q1 conducts and passes +15V
to hold the Enable line input positive. The action continues throughout
the duration of the pulse.
When the FWD or REV button button is pressed, +8V to +14V is
applied to the inverting input of U2D through RN1/D1 (FWD) or RN1/
D2 (REV). R1 and C6 provide a 100 mS delay when the load button is
pressed. When a U2D inverting input votage is greater than +5.5V,
the output of U2D will switch the output negative. This negative voltage discharges capacitor C5, and prevents U1 from resetting.
NOTE: If the load button is released, the Timed Enable circuit
will remain active for approximately 5 seconds. One
button loading is still available during this time.
If FWD or REV is pressed prior to, or simultaneously with, the
ENABLE button, the Timed Enable circuit is disabled, and the injector
head functions as a standard Mark V Plus injector head. This occurs
when the inverting input to U2C (pin 10) goes more positive than the
non-inverting input (pin 11 referenced at +1.9V). The output of U2C
switches to negative, grounding the inverting input to U2A. If the
ENABLE switch is pressed, the pulse developed by C3 and RN1/RN2
is grounded, and the Timed Enable circuit is not activated.

Single Button Disarm:


Pressing any button, or combination of buttons on the Injector Head,
will disarm the injector. Approximately 2-5 volts is required to disable
the Safe Relay and disarm the injector. If Forward or Reverse load are
pressed, +5 volts supplies the soft pots through D4, and follows the
same path as normal loading. If Enable is pressed, +15 volts goes
through the switch, R11, D3 and D5, and Q3 and Q5 to the PDCP/
PDCI. In either case, the voltage is sensed as a disarm.

Forward/Reverse
Clamping Circuit

This circuit protects the piston motor and ballscrew from high speed
collisions by clamping the load command at the slow speed value
when the piston is approximately 0.25 (0.635 cm) from forward or
reverse limits. At fast speed, approximately +14 volts is applied to the
drive circuit on the PDCP. As the piston approaches front or rear limits, the load command is clamped to +9.1 volts (slow speed).
Forward Load Clamp - U1B/Z1:
The non-inverting input of U1B is referenced at +9.0 volts by a voltage
divider consisting of R8, R9, R7, and R17. The inverting input is a
buffered plunger position voltage (U3A), while output of U1B is in positive saturation if the plunger position is below the reference. As the
piston moves forward, plunger position voltage increases. When the
reference input is reached, U1B goes to zero, making Z1 (9.1 volts
zener diode) conduct, clamping the forward load command (base of
Q3) to +9.1 volts, driving the motor at slow speed.
14 - 7

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


Reverse Load Clamp - (U2B/Z5):
The inverting input of U2B is referenced at +0.66 volts by a voltage
divider consisting of R8, R9, R7, and R17. The non-inverting input is a
buffered plunger position voltage (U3A), while output of U2B is in positive saturation if plunger position is above the reference. As the piston
moves in reverse, plunger position voltage decreases. When voltage
drops below the reference input, U2B goes to zero, making Z5 (9.1
volts zener diode) conduct; thus clamping the reverse load command
(base of Q5) to +9.1 volts, driving the motor at slow speed.
Volume Remaining
Display
(3002033)

The Volume Remaining Display provides a 3 digit display of the


amount of contrast media remaining in the syringe. DVM IC U4 uses
the buffered plunger position from U2A to derive the Volume Remaining Display (seven segment LED output). The plunger position is
inverted and offset by U2C and sent to the scale switching voltage
divider network R23, R4, R6, R14, R16, Q5, and Q6. The output of the
divider is sent to the input of U4.
PALs U8 and U9 buffer the LED outputs and drive the seven segment
LEDs directly (non-multiplexed). The PALs are also responsible for
all leading zero blanking, and displaying 200.
U5 is a supply IC that produces the -5V supply required by U4.

Volume Remaining
Display
(78101-13-AP-01 and
78101-15-AP-01)

The Volume Remaining Display provides a 3 digit display of the


amount of contrast media remaining in the syringe. DVM IC U6 uses
plunger position (analog input) to derive the Volume Remaining Display (multiplexed, 7-segment LED output). The plunger position feedback potentiometer voltage is buffered by U3A before it is sent to U6.
U3B establishes the voltage reference for U6 (scaling). The voltage
reference (VR) determines display output for a given analog input.
Display enables are controlled by D1-4 of U6, through inverters
U8A,C,D. If the value is zero, U7 controls the blanking of the 100s
display (DS4), and the 10s display (DS5). U7 also controls the displays enabling the appropriate read-out.

Turret Sensing
Circuit

The Turret Sensing circuit detects if the turret is in position for an


injection or loading without the use of mechanical limit switches.
Turret Detection:
When the turret is in position, +26 volts follows a series path from the
Injector Head to the PDCP and SCC. When the turret is in position,
+26 volts is switched through transistor Q7. Q7 is enabled by either
U8E/D8 or U4C/D9, depending upon turret position. Next, the voltage
is sent through the normally open contacts of the Mechanical Stop
Limit switch; then, to energize Safe Relay K1 (PDCP/PDCI) and U16
(PIO 3 on the SCC), alerting the system that the injector head is ready
for injection. To determine if the turret is in position, an optical sensing
circuit is used. Two optical sensors, mounted on a PC Card in the
Injector Head, are set-up as active high, meaning that the transistor

14 - 8

Injector Head
portion of the sensor is ON (or active), when infrared light passes from
the LED to the base of the transistor. The slotted drum, mounted on
the turret shaft, rotates with the turret, and permits activation of the
sensor that corresponds to turret position.
Mechanical Stop
Position / Arm Light
Enable Circuit

This circuit provides a visual indication that the Mechanical Stop is in


position, and that the injector is armed. When the injector is armed,
the software sends a position command to the Mechanical Stop DAC,
producing an analog command voltage for the MSD Card, which
drives the Mechanical Stop motor. Mechanical Stop position is
tracked by the Mechanical Stop Position Feedback Potentiometer.
When the position feedback voltage indicates that the Mechanical
Stop is correctly positioned (through software comparison with the
Mechanical Stop Position Command), the system sends an ARMED
indication through the I/O and MSD cards, which lights the Mechanical
Stop Set LED, and makes the Arm Light Bar flash.
Mechanical Stop in Position:
In standby, the non-inverting input of U1A is +5 volts (charging of C8
through R14), and inverting input is +3.4 volts (voltage divider R21/
R26), making the output of U1A positive saturation. When the injector
is armed, and the system has determined that the Mechanical Stop is
correctly positioned, ARMLTDR alternates low then high, momentarily
discharging C8 through D1, dropping the non-inverting input to zero.
Positive 3.4 volts on the inverting input causes the output to go to
zero, which makes Q1 conduct, supplying ground to light Mechanical
Stop Set LED DS1. The narrow width of the ARMLTDR pulses, coupled with the large value of R14, prevents C8 from charging, keeping
output of U1A at zero, and the LED lit continuously until the injector is
disarmed.
Arm Light Bar Enable:
When the injector is armed, ARMLTDR alternates low then high,
causing the Arm Light Bar to flash. When the handswitch is pressed to
initiate the injection, ARMLTDR stays low, keeping the Arm Light Bar
lit continuously throughout the injection. When the injection is complete, ARMLTDR will either alternate low then high (MULTI Arm), or
remain high (SINGLE Arm).

Mechanical Stop
Motor Disable

This circuit disables the Mechanical Stop motor M2 if the piston is in


the full forward position when power is applied. This prevents the
Mechanical Stop and piston plates from colliding during Self Test. The
voltage path for M2 goes through the normally-closed contacts of
relay K1 (located on the Injector Head Card), which is controlled by
U2C. U2C compares the plunger position with a set reference to energize K1. The non-inverting input of U2C (pin 9), is fixed at +9.35 volts
by a voltage divider network (R7,R8,R9,R17), while the inverting input
(pin 8), receives the buffer plunger position voltage from U3A. When
the piston is not at full forward limit, voltage at pin 9 is greater than
that at pin 8, making the output of U2C (pin 14) positive saturation, deenergizing K1. As the piston moves forward, voltage at pin 8
14 - 9

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


increases. When the voltage at pin 8 exceeds that at pin 9, U2C
switches to zero, making Q4 conduct, and energizing K1. The normally-closed contacts of K1 open, breaking the Mechanical Stop
motor voltage path.
SIP Switches

The 78101-15-AP-01 (H5D) universal injector head Display Card contains several SIP type switches for proper set-up of the card. The
switches must be set according to the type of injector head in which
the card is installed. Refer to the chart below:
SWITCH SETTINGS

60/150
150/200

S1 - 1
S1 - 2
S1 - 3
S1 - 3
S1 - 4
S2 - 1
S2 - 2
S2 - 3
S2 - 4

14 - 10

S1-1

S1-2

S1-3

S1-4

S2-1

S2-2

S2-3

S2-4

ON
ON

OFF
OFF

OFF
ON

ON
OFF

ON
ON

OFF
ON

OFF
OFF

OFF
OFF

= 150 ml SCALE SELECTION


= NOT USED
= 200 ml SCALE SELECTION
= NOT USED (3002033)
= 63 ml SCALE SELECTION
= SYRINGE SELECT BAR LAMPS ON/OFF
= TURRET 60 ml POSITION DISABLE/ENABLE (ON/OFF)
= TURRET POSITION SENSE DISABLE/ENABLE (ON/OFF)
= TURRET POSITION SENSE DISABLE/ENABLE (ON/OFF)

Injector Head

Figure 14.2: Block Diagram: Head Card B, H5D

14 - 11

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


NOTES:

14 - 12

Imaging System Interface

15

Imaging System
Interface
NOTE: In CRC systems that contain no options, an ISI Dummy
Card must be installed in the ISI slot. New MBR(I)
(assemblies 85106-07-AP-02 and 85106-07-AP-03)
Motherboards utilize two switches which eliminate the
need for an ISI Dummy Card.
The Imaging System Interface, ISI 100, is an option that allows the
Mark V / Mark V Plus to be interfaced with film changer programmers,
computer systems, and other digital imaging equipment. This card
also provides I/O for control and synchronization of the injection for
remote monitoring.
NOTE: When reference is made to input and output, the reference is in respect to the injector.
Two interface groups are provided: Analog Outputs (J15 or J106), and
the Imaging System Interface (J40). The analog outputs provide information about the injection for display or recording. The following signals are provided by the Analog group (available at J15 or J106 on the
injector rear panel):
Injection Duration

Injection Flow Profile / Velocity

Injection Volume

High-Level ECG Output w/optional Trigger


Output Marker (J15 only)

To achieve control and synchronization, eight inputs and outputs are


provided by the Imaging System Interface group (available at J40 on
the injector rear panel):
Disarm control input

Armed / Extended Armed signal output

Handswitch disable input

X-Ray Trigger Output

Injector start input

ECG Gated output

Injecting signal output

Handswitch Closed

15 - 1

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

CAUTION: The Remote Start Signal from the film changer


programmer (at pins 7 and 9 of J40), must never contain
voltage or AC noise. Any voltage applied to these pins can
damage the injector and void the warranty. An excess of
50 or 60 cycle AC noise on these lines may cause intermittent problems of premature, or no injections.
CAUTION: The Remote Start Signal from the film changer
programmer must remain closed throughout the duration
of the injection. If the start signal is removed before the
injection volume limits when armed in the SINGLE mode,
the injection will stop, the unit will disarm, and display
PREMATURE TERMINATION on the Control Panel. If
the start signal is removed before the injection volume limits when armed in the MULTIple mode, the injection will
stop, the Mechanical Stop will reposition at the selected
volume, and the unit will remain armed. If a start signal is
received at this time, an additional injection will result at
the selected Flow Rate and Volume.
It is recommended that the remote start command remain
closed for approximately three additional seconds after the
calculated injection duration. This additional time should
allow completion of the injection in the event that the actual
injection duration is longer than the calculated duration.
(When the injector pressure limits, and/or a linear rise factor is programmed, the calculated injection duration will
increase accordingly.)

15 - 2

CAUTION: When starting the injection process from a


remote location by the use of a relay closure in the film
changer programmer, always install a panic button in
series with the start signal. This function must be provided
in the event that the operator must immediately terminate
the injection. This button should be installed in a convenient location, properly labeled, and instructions for use
provided to all users of the injection system.

Imaging System Interface

Figure 15.1: Rear Connector Panel


15 - 3

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


Analog Output
Signals

Analog signal circuits are contained on the Mark V / Mark V Plus ISI
100 Option Card. For the following description, refer to the block diagram on page 15 - 5. Output voltages of J15 (J106) are referenced to
buffered ground J15-11 (J106-9,10,11).

Injection Duration
Output Circuit

The purpose of this output signal is to display and record on an external monitor when the Mark V / Mark V Plus is actually injecting.
Buffer U1D and associated components, comprise the Injection Duration Output Circuit. This signal, at connector J15 (J106), pin 1 (1), displays the time duration of the injection. The output will be at zero during
standby, +5 VDC during the injection. (See also, Injecting Output Circuit).

Injection Volume
Output Circuit

The purpose of this output signal is to display and record on an external monitor the voltage at the beginning and end of an injection. The
difference between these two values is equal to the actual volume
injected.
Buffer U1A and associated components, comprise the Injection Volume Output Circuit. This signal, at connector J15 (J106) pin 13 (3),
tracks the plunger position. Subtracting the position at the end of an
injection from the position at the start, is the actual volume injected.
Signal voltage varies with the syringe size in use:
200 ML syringe = +0.6 VDC/10 ml
150 ML syringe = +0.8 VDC/10 ml
60 ML syringe = +2.0 VDC/10 ml

Injection Flow Profile


Output Circuit
(Velocity)

The purpose of this output signal is to display and record on an external monitor, a voltage change which is proportional to the achieved
Flow Rate (not the selected Flow Rate).
Buffer U1B and associated components, comprise the Injection Flow
Profile Output Circuit. This signal, at connector J15 (J106) pin 4 (2), is
directly proportional to the actual achieved Flow Rate. Switching FET
Q4 adjusts the gain of U1B, adapting for different syringe sizes. Signal
voltage varies with syringe size:
150 or 200 ML syringe = 2.0 VDC/10 ml/sec.
60 ML syringe = 6.5 VDC/10 ml/sec.

High Level ECG


Output

15 - 4

The purpose of the High Level ECG Output signal is to display and
record, on an external monitor, the patient ECG signal which is present
on the Mark V / Mark V Plus optional ECG/Scope. It is most common to
use this output signal when patient ECG electrodes are connected to
the Medrad PMI 100 ECG pre-amp, which then connects to the Mark V
/ Mark V Plus. The signal (2.2 volts, baseline to peak) is available at
J15 pin 7, or J106 pin 4.

Imaging System Interface


Amplifiers U2A, U2B, U2D, and associated circuitry, are used to buffer
and filter the output of the pre-amp to J15 pin 7, or J106 pin 4.
ECG Trigger
Output Marker

The Mark V and Mark V Plus not only have the capability to perform
ECG triggered injections (with the optional ECG Trigger), but also to
display the ECG trigger point on the internal scope by the use of an
Intensified Spot, superimposed on the QRS complex. The purpose of
the ECG Trigger Output Marker (TOM), is to display this Intensified
Spot information on an external monitor.
The ECG Trigger Output Marker is an addition to the High Level ECG
Output signal from J15 pin 7, or J106 pin 4. When switch S2 or jumper
JU2C is closed, a 1 volt rectangular pulse from U6 is superimposed on
the High Level ECG Output signal. This pulse, 40 - 50ms in duration,
coincides with the Intensified Spot on the Mark V / Mark V Plus internal
Scope. This depicts the beginning of an injection, and can be displayed
on an external monitor. This signal uses the High Level ECG output of
J15, pins 11 and 7, or J106, pins 4 and 9.

Buffered Ground
Circuit

Buffer U1C and drivers Q1 and Q2, provide a buffered ground at connector J15, pin 11 (J106-9, 10, 11). This circuit maintains zero volts at
the ground for accurate measurements. By isolating the return line from
the injector ground, this circuit protects other circuits in the injector, in
the event that pin 11 (9, 10, 11) would have a large external voltage
applied to it.

Figure 15.2: Block Diagram: Analog Output Signals


15 - 5

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


The Imaging System Interface Circuits are contained on the Mark V /
Mark V Plus ISI 100 Option Card. The disarm and handswitch disable
inputs are buffered by the ISI Isolation Card, a separate card mounted
on the motherboard. Newer units have ISI Isolation Card circuitry
incorporated directly into the circuitry of the motherboard, therefore
eliminating the separate card. For the following description, refer to
the block diagram on page 15 - 9.
Disarm Input Circuit

Inverters / buffers U3D and U3E comprise the Remote Disarm Input
Circuit. These components are controlled by an external switch closure, connecting J40 pins 6 and 8. When the external switch closes,
U3D activates a signal that disarms, or prevents arming of the injector. When the external switch opens, the injector can then be armed.

!
Handswitch Disable
Input Circuit

CAUTION: Do not apply voltage to J40 pins 6 or 8. Equipment damage or malfunction may result.

Inverter U3A and relay K3 comprise the Handswitch Disable Input Circuit. This circuit is controlled by an external switch closure, connecting
J40 pins 5 and 6. This circuit can disable the injector handswitch,
making the start of an injection possible only from a remote start control. This disabling is useful in the prevention of miscued starts by the
operator when connected to an imaging system. When the external
switch closes, relay K3 energizes and disables the handswitch circuit.
When the external switch opens, the handswitch circuit again functions normally.
NOTE: This input disables the Front Panel start switch, J13 on
CRC units and pedestal units serial numbered 63202
and above, the front cord reel on pedestal units, and
J121 and J122 on -PI units.
NOTE: When using this input, the injector can still be started
from the Remote Panel (if the jumper on the the RPC
Card is connecting pins 1 and 2), J19/J20, or J40. Pedestal units serial numbered below 63202 can also be
started from a handswitch or footswitch attached at
connector J13.

Handswitch
Operated Output

15 - 6

CAUTION: Do not apply voltage to J40 pins 5 or 6. Equipment damage or malfunction may result.

The following component designations are for CRC MBR Motherboards. For Pedestal Systems (EPI Cards), Q4 is designated as Q2,
and for -I Pedestal Systems (MICC Cards), K2 is designated as K3,
and Q4 is designated as Q2. This circuit provides an indication that
the handswitch is closed when the Handswitch Disable circuit is
active, through relay K2 and transistor Q4. When J40 pins 5 and 6 are
shorted, the Handswitch Disable circuit is enabled, and the normal

Imaging System Interface


ground path of the handswitch is opened. When the handswitch is
depressed, Q4 will activate, supplying ground to energize K2. This provides a relay closure at J40 pins 14 and 15, thus supplying the external
device with an indication then the handswitch is depressed. When the
Handswitch Disable circuit is disabled, J40 pins 5 and 6 are open, and
K2 is disabled. Relay contacts at J40 pins 14 and 15 are rated for 28
VDC at 1 amp.
Injector Start Input

This input, at J40 pins 7 and 9, is used to start the injector from the
Imaging System. This connection is the same as other hard-wired start
switches. To start the injector after it has been armed, provide a switch
or a pair of normally open, isolated relay contacts. The contacts must
remain closed during the entire injection. Opening these contacts during the injection will result in the termination of the injection.

!
Injecting Output
Circuit

CAUTION: Do not apply voltage to J40 pins 7 or 9. Equipment damage or malfunction may result.

The purpose of this output signal is very similar to that of the Injection
Duration Output. The Injection Duration output is a voltage to an external monitor, while the injecting output is a relay closure to an Imaging
System.
Inverter U3B and relay K2, comprise the Injecting Output Circuit. This
injecting output from the injector, indicates when an injection is occurring, and is useful for timing, synchronization, and as a status indicator.
Relay contacts of J40 pins 1 and 2, are open during standby, including
when the injector is armed but not injecting. The contacts are closed
during an injection, and open when the volume limit is reached, or the
start switch is opened. Relay contact rating is 28 VDC, at 1 amp.

Armed Output
Signals

J40 pins 3 and 4, provide an Armed output signal, or an Extended


Armed Output signal as detailed below. At installation, switch S3 or
jumper JU2A is used to select the appropriate signal: The purpose of
this signal is to alert the film changer or Imaging System that the injector is armed and ready to inject, before initiating the filming sequence.
Switch S3 or jumper JU2A is used to select either the Armed or
Extended Armed output from pins 3 and 4 of J40.
Armed Output Signals
Inverter U3C and relay K1 comprise the armed output circuit. The signal at J40 pins 3 and 4, indicates when the injector is armed. The relay
contacts are open when disarmed, or closed when single or multiple
armed, regardless of start switch status. The injector must be armed
before any injection can start. Relay contact maximum rating is 28
VDC, at 1 amp.
Extended Armed Output
This output uses the Armed Output Signal relay contacts. When the
injector is armed, the contacts close, giving an indication to the imag15 - 7

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


ing system that the injector is ready to inject. When the injection is
complete, and the start switch (or external start lines) remain closed,
the Extended Armed relay will remain closed, allowing the imaging
system to complete the filming sequence. Although the Extended
Armed Output remains active with the start lines closed, the Safe
Relay will de-energize when a single bolus injection is complete.
Relay contact maximum rating is 28 VDC, at 1 amp.
X-Ray Trigger Output

This signal is the conventional Film Changer Trigger Relay. This signal allows the injector to automatically trigger the film changer during
an injection procedure.
This connection, at J40 pins 10 and 11, uses the standard Film
Changer Relay located in the Control Unit of the Mark V / Mark V Plus
This output provides an isolated relay closure that is open during
standby, or closed when three conditions are satisfied: the injector is
armed, the start switch is closed, and the X-Ray delay has passed.
Once closed, the contacts will remain closed until the start switch is
opened.
This connection is also present as a standard feature on the Mark V /
Mark V Plus, and is available at X-Ray connector J19 on the rear
panel. To eliminate the running of two cables, this connection can be
wired through J40, and the ISI 100 interface cable, XMC-905. Relay
contact maximum rating of 28 VDC at 10 amps.

ECG Gated Output

The purpose of this output is to cycle the Cine camera on and off, in
conjunction with the ECG triggering of contrast media, to minimize
exposure time.
This output uses a set of normally open relay contacts at J40 pins 12
and 13. The ECG Gated Output can be selected, by switch S4 or
jumper JU2B, to give a pulsed output (relay K5 opening and closing)
representing either an R-wave input or the Intensified Spot input. The
duration of this signal is factory set at 200 milliseconds, however it
may be adjusted for any duration between 10mS and 400mS by
adjusting the value of R44. The ECG Gated Output uses pins 12 and
13 of J40. Relay contact maximum rating is 28 VDC at 1 amp.
NOTE: The ISI-100R card can be installed in place of either an
ISI-100 Card or an IDC (Interface Dummy Card), the
Extended Armed Output may be accessed with minimal unit modification. The ECG Gated Output and Trigger Output Marker options require wiring modifications
if they are to be accessed in an ECG/Scope injector.
Mark V / Mark V Plus Pedestal Systems, serial number
5I4SU 22138 and above, will not require these modifications.
NOTE: To utilize ECG Gated Output or Trigger Output Marker
signal, an injector must have the ECG/Scope option.

15 - 8

Imaging System Interface

Figure 15.3: Block Diagram: Imaging System Interface


15 - 9

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

ISI Card 78101-10-AP-16 (with Siemens Z5 Option)


When jumper JU5 is set to universal mode, operation of ISI Card
78101-10-AP-16 is identical to previous release ISI Cards. When JU5
is set to the Z5 option (Siemens Interface), card operation is altered
as outlined below.
Injector Arming

When the injector is armed, a high signal (+5V) is supplied to U5D,


pins 12 and 13, which produces a low (0V or ground) at pin 11. The
low is directly coupled to U4A pin 2, producing a high output at U4A
pin 3. The low causes relay K1 to energize, thus supplying +26VDC
through connector J40 pin 4, to one side of the coil for relay SR4 in
the Siemens equipment interface. The other side of SR4 is connected
to Buffered Ground (BGND) through J40 pin 3. When SR4 energizes,
+26VDC is supplied to one side of coils of Siemens interface relays
SR1, SR2, and SR3.

Injection Initiation

In this interface mode, the injection is initiated by the Siemens imaging equipment. When the Injector Start command is initiated (on the
Siemens equipment), relays SR1, SR2, and SR3 energize, supplying
+26VDC to the coils of relay K2 on the ISI Card. The other side of the
coil is connected to BGND through JU5, pins 5 and 6. When K2 energizes, BGND is supplied to J40 pin 2. Internal to the interface cable
(XMC 970, 971, 972, or 973) is a jumper between J40 pin 2 and 9
(J40 pin 9 is the Remote Start), thus when K2 energizes, BGND is
supplied to J40 pin 9 through J40 pin 2.

15 - 10

Imaging System Interface

Figure 15.4: Schematic:Siemens Interface (with Switchbox Option)

The Siemens table can be fitted with an adaptor (Medrad catalog number SCK 100) which allows
the Mark V Plus Injector Head to be mounted directly to the table. Contact Medrad for availability.

15 - 11

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Figure 15.5: Schematic: Siemens Interface (without Switchbox Option)

15 - 12

Imaging System Interface

Figure 15.6: Schematic: Phillips Interface XMC 925

Figure 15.7: Schematic: Phillips Interface XMC 926


The Phillips table can be fitted with an adaptor (Medrad catalog number PCK 100) which allows the
Mark V Plus Injector Head to be mounted directly to the table. Contact Medrad for availability.
15 - 13

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Figure 15.8: Schematic: Phillips Interface XMC 935

Figure 15.9: Schematic: Phillips Interface XMC 936

15 - 14

Remote Panel

16

Remote Panel
The Remote Panel is a microprocessor controlled device for communicating with the Mark V / Mark V Plus console. It allows the user to
program and monitor the injector from a remote location. Remote
Panel operations are essentially the same as with the Control Panel
on the Mark V / Mark V Plus console.
Through a cable, the Remote Panel connects to J22 on the rear connector panel, which provides power to the Remote Panel, and allows
two-way serial communication between the devices.
The communication protocol is RS-232C, with automatic retries and
error checking. During power-up or recovery from System Monitor
faults, the Remote Panel and console try to establish error-free communications. If communication errors occur, an error message will be
displayed on one of the Sentinels.
The Remote Panel is comprised of a Remote Panel Control Card and
a Display Card connected by a ribbon cable.
The microprocessor, memory chips, interface logic, and power supply
are contained on the Remote Panel Control Card, and described in
more detail in this section. Keyboard control logic and displays are
contained on the Display Card in the Front Panel assembly, and are
described in Section 10.

16 - 1

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Remote Panel Controller Card


Refer to the block diagram on page 16 - 4.
The Remote Panel Controller Card consists of two major sections:
Digital Logic
Power Converter.
Digital Logic

The digital logic portion on the Remote Panel Control Card is comprised of the microprocessor, memory chips, and interface logic.

CPU

The CPU (U13) is supported by 16 Kbytes of EPROM / PROM (program memory), and 8 Kbytes of RAM. The processor interfaces with
the remaining logic through an 8-bit data bus, 16-bit address bus, and
5-line control bus.

Clock

Crystal Y2 (8.0 MHz), with U8 and U6, generates a clock signal of 4


MHz for the CPU and associated peripherals. Crystals Y1 (3.6864
MHz) and U6 provide the UART U10 clock on Revision B boards and
below. Boards above Revision B (RDCP 45241 and above) supply
UART U10 with a 1.843 mHz (Y1) crystal oscillator clock.

Memory

Processor memory is comprised of three chips: U15 and U16, each


providing 16 Kbytes of program memory (EPROM); U14, providing 8
Kbytes of data memory (RAM).

Memory / I/O Decoder

Memory / I/O decoder U12 receives the CPU address, data and control busses, and decodes and activates the peripheral chips.

PIO

Programmable Input/Output chip U2 provides the processor with 17 I/


O lines: Twelve of these lines (A0-A3, B0-B7) scan the panel keyboard; One output line (A7) drives buzzer BZ1; One line (A6) is the
remote handswitch input; One output, A5, drives the Arm light of an
armed indicating handswitch.
For additional information on Keypad inputs, see the I/O Card
Description on page 7 - 1.

CTC

Counter-timer chip U5 provides several functions for the processor.


Counters in the CTC let the processor time internal events. The CTC
receives interrupt requests from UART U10, and controls interrupts to
the processor.

UART

Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (UART) U10, serially


communicates with the Main Unit. The UART converts parallel data
bus information into serial information. Data sent from the Remote
Panel to the console is formatted and transmitted by the UART. Data
from the main unit is received by the UART, is converted to parallel
format, and interrupts the CPU to signal that data is present in the
receive holding register.

16 - 2

Remote Panel
Line Drivers

Level converting drivers in U9 (RPC) or U20 (RPCP) change the


UART 0 and 5 VDC transmission signals into 12 VDC signals (RPC)
or 10 VDC (RPCP), respectively. These signals are then compatible
with the RS-232C communication standard.

Line Receivers

Level converting receivers in U11 (RPC) or U20 (RPCP) change


incoming RS-232C signals (12 VDC on RPC or 10 VDC on RPCP)
into 0 and 5 VDC signals, respectively. These signals are then compatible with the UART, and can be assembled for the processor.

Display Decoder

Display driver U4 interfaces with the Display Card. U4 receives the


address and control buses from the processor, an enable line from
decoder U12, and provides enable strobes to the 4 display drivers on
the Display Card.

Bus Buffers

Bus signals transmitted from the processor to the Display Card are
buffered by U3 and U7.

PIO Output Buffer

Logic inverter U1 buffers the A5-A7 PIO outputs.

Ferrite Beads
(RPCP only)

Ferrite Beads FB1-FB11 are used to suppress noise transmitted from


the power source. The beads are also used on transmit receive lines
for U20, the arm light, and PIO start inputs.

Wait State

RPCP boards numbered below 45241 utilized a Zilog Z8581 clock


generator. The Zilog Z8581 has system wait state features which were
required for INTERSIL display drivers. These display drivers require a
4 mHz operating system wait state for proper operation.
RPCP boards numbered 45241 and above utilize the Intel D82C284-8
clock generator, which will not support wait state, and new generation
MAXIM and HARRIS display drivers which do not require wait-state
support.

16 - 3

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Figure 16.1: Block Diagram: Remote Panel Digital Logic

16 - 4

Remote Panel

DC to DC Converter
Refer to the block diagram on page 16 - 6.
The DC to DC converter is responsible for converting +26 volt (supplied through the Remote Panel cable) to a regulated +5 volts, in
order to power the digital circuitry. The method of regulating the +5
volts supply is like that used on the Power Supply Card, with the
exception of component designation differences. In addition, on RPC
cards only, the output of switching FET Q4 generates +12 and -12
volts, required by the RS-232 for Remote Panel communications.
+5 Volt Regulator
Circuit

The +26 volt supply is filtered and regulated to +5 volts using Pulse
Width Modulator (PWM IC) U17, switching the +26 volt supply through
FET Q4. Pins 11 and 14 of U17, will pulse low then high, at a frequency determined by R30, R31, and C38 (approximately 150 KHz).
The pulses are ORed through D5 and D8, and applied to Q5 and Q6,
which pulse the gate of FET Q4. Zener diode D9 protects Q4 by limiting the gate to source voltage to a maximum 15 volts. The output of
Q4 is filtered by transformer T1 or inductor L1, capacitors C26 and
C27 or C26 and C52, and load resistor R12.
Regulation of the +5 volt supply is through the PWM and support circuitry. Resistor R32 and R33 establish reference at U17 pin 2. +5 volts
is coupled back to U17 pin 1, through a voltage divider network of R28
and R34. Voltages are compared to determine pulse width at U17 pins
11 and 14. If voltage is low, pulse width is lengthened to increase voltage; if voltage is high, pulse width is shortened to decrease voltage.

+5 Volt Overcurrent
Protection

The +5 volt supply has overcurrent protection circuitry which will shut
down the PWM IC (and the +5 volts) if current exceeds 2-4 amperes.
If voltage across sampling resistor R13 exceeds a certain value, Q2
and Q3 conduct, sending +10 to +12 volts through Q3, to U17 pin 10
(Shut Down), which stops pulses at pins 11 and 14. The PWM IC will
restore the +5 volts if the overcurrent condition is eliminated.

+5 Volt Overvoltage
Protection

+5 volts overvoltage protection is provided by 6.2 volt zener diode D8,


and 3 amp picofuse F1. If supply rises above +5 volts, D8 conducts,
drawing current. If voltage continues to rise, D8 will breakdown, shorting the +5 volts supply to ground. The combination of voltage and current drawn when D8 shorts, will cause F1 to open, removing +26 volts
from the PWM IC.

+12/-12 Volts
Regulator Circuit
(RPC only)

Remote Panel RS-232 serial communication circuitry requires +12/-12


volts as a supply voltage, to ensure sufficient voltage and current
required to send information over cable lengths of up to 100 feet (30.5
meters). Line Driver U9 converts the 0 to + 5 volts of UART U10, to
+12 and - 12 volts respectively. The primary winding of transformer T1
(described in the +5 volt regulator circuit), receives 0 to +26 volt

16 - 5

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


pulses from switching FET Q4. The secondary of T1 develops 30 VAC
CT (15 VAC each winding). Positive pulses are rectified by diode D4,
filtered by capacitor C31, and sent to +12 volt regulator U19 to
become +12 VDC. Negative pulses are rectified by diode D3, filtered
by capacitor C32, and sent to +12 volt regulator U18 to become -12
VDC. Outputs are filtered before being sent to U9.

Figure 16.2: Block Diagram: Remote Panel: DC to DC Converter

16 - 6

ECG/Scope Option

17

ECG/Scope Option
NOTE: The ECG / Scope option is not available on -I units.

Overview

The purposes of the ECG trigger are: To start an injection synchronized


to the patients heart rate, to control the number of boluses delivered
over a number of cardiac cycles, and to interrupt the injection if an Rwave occurs during a bolus. These features are variable and can be
switched off.
The purpose of the Scope is: To display the ECG and injection profile.
This display aids in set up of ECG triggered injections, and interpretation of the results.
The ECG section functions to obtain and detect an R-wave. The
remainder of the triggering, timing, display, and panel inputs, are controlled by software.
If a unit contains the ECG/Scope option and a Remote Panel, when
power is applied to the ECG section, the Remote Panel can be used in
the monitor mode only.
In Control Room Console systems, the ECG/Scope Unit cannot be positioned more than 6 ft.(1.83 m) from the CRC.
There is some overlap between the ECG and Scope circuits. Some circuits serve both functions, with interconnections between functions. To
track the connections between the ECG/Scope Circuit Cards, and
between these cards and the main unit, refer to the ECG/Scope Interconnection and Motherboard Schematics.

General Description

ECG Input
These circuits receive an ECG signal and process it for R-wave triggering and timing, which is used for all ECG and Scope functions.
ECG/Scope Control Panel
A sandwich of cards that process keyed inputs from the Control Panel,
display values pertinent to the ECG/Scope, and provide signals and
controls to other circuits.
Scope Memory Card
Provides most of the functions required by the Scope, including signal
processing, memory, and synchronization.
17 - 1

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


General Description
(cont.)

Scope Deflection Card


Controls vertical and horizontal deflection and display functions.
Scope Power Supply Card
Provides power for the Scope drive circuits and display tube.

ECG Input

These circuits receive the ECG signal and process it for R-wave triggering and timing, which is used for all ECG and Scope functions.
There are two ways of obtaining an ECG input with the Mark V: High
level input signal from a monitor, or Low level signal from electrodes
applied directly to the patient. With high level input, the monitor
derives input from patient electrodes, and amplifies it for the injector.
By using this signal, use of a second set of electrodes can be avoided.
The standard ECG circuits can accept a high level signal. Circuitry is
contained on the ISI Card and the I/O Card. The optional ECG preamp is needed to process a low level signal, which derives power
from the injector, and supplies a high level ECG signal to the ISI Card.
The following encompasses circuitry in three areas and functions:

17 - 2

ECG Pre-amp: Low level ECG input

ISI Card: High level ECG input

I/O Card: R-wave detection

Figure 17.1: Block Diagram: ECG Input Section

ECG/Scope Option
ECG Pre-amp:
Low Level ECG Input

The ECG pre-amp is required when ECG input for the injector is being
obtained directly from patient electrodes. This module plugs into J44
on the back of the injector through a 25 ft. (7.6 m) cable, and permits
placement of the pre-amp next to the patient. For a block diagram of
the ECG input section, refer to figure 17.1.
The pre-amp receives power through the cable connected to the injector, and returns a high level ECG signal to the injector.
The following circuitry is in the ECG pre-amp:
Isolation Amplifier
Inputs to U1 are supplied from electrodes attached to the patient.
These inputs are electrically isolated by U1 for low leakage and high
noise immunity.
High-Gain AC Amplifier
U2A amplifies the ECG signal with limited bandwidth for high gain with
noise immunity.
AC-Coupled Buffer
U2B further amplifies the ECG signal so that a high level signal is sent
back to the injector. The output magnitude is 4.5 volts with a 1 mV
input.

ISI Card:
High Level ECG Input

The ECG input circuitry on the ISI Card receives a high level signal
from either the ECG pre-amp or an external monitor. Both signals can
be presented at J44 on the rear connector panel.
To provide a high level signal from a monitor, connect cable IMC 955
at J44, then connect the other end to the monitor. The external signal
being supplied should be at least 0.5 volts at the R-wave peak. If necessary, input sensitivity can be adjusted (R16 on ISI Card) to work reliably with a signal as low as 0.2 volts.
AC Amplifier
U2D input is a high level ECG signal, either from the pre-amp or an
external device such as a monitor. The pre-amp signal is scaled for
noise rejection and to match the typical signal levels from monitors.
Notch Filter
The R-C network between U2D and U2A limits line frequency noise
from the ECG signal. By setting switch S1 or jumper JU1, the cutoff
frequency of the network is adjusted for 50 or 60 Hz. U2A buffers the
filter output, which is sent to the I/O Card for R-wave detection, and to
the Scope for display.
ECG Output Buffer
U2B buffers the ECG signal, available at J15 as the high level ECG
output.
17 - 3

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


I/O Card:
R-Wave Detection

Some ECG input circuitry is located on the I/O Card. This circuitry
derives a trigger pulse at the R-wave, used for the triggering and timing
of ECG/Scope functions.
ECG Attenuator
Because the ECG signal can vary in amplitude, the circuit comprised of
U20 and U21 can attenuate the ECG signal from the ISI Card. Multiplying DAC U21 attenuates the signal based on the digital word on the
data bus when latch U20 is strobed.
The processor controls the resultant attenuation when the GAIN Up/
Down buttons on the ECG control panel are pressed. U26 (U24) buffers
the ECG signal, with gain determined by R7, R15, and the impedance
of U21.
R-Wave Detector
U23 (U26) is configured to detect the rapid rise time of an R-wave. It
readily passes R-waves, but rejects other waves with lesser rise times.
Pulse Conditioner
U25 (U27) squares the R-wave detected by U23 (U26), and provides
hysteresis for stability. R-wave pulses are used by the counter/timer
chip (CTC) to synchronize ECG triggered injections, and to control
Scope functions. The remaining triggering and timing functions are controlled by software, using the CTC R-wave as a reference pulse.

17 - 4

ECG/Scope Option

ECG/Scope Control Panel


The controls and displays for the ECG and Scope section, except the
display tube itself, are processed by the Control Panel subassembly.
The Control Panel subassembly is a sandwich of cards:

The keyboard overlay contains the push-button switches interconnected by a matrix of four columns and eight rows. Through a ribbon cable, this matrix is connected to the PIO2 on the standard I/
O Card which scans the matrix and reads the keyed inputs.

The Display Card contains the alphanumeric displays and LEDs


that provide information to the operator. The display also contains
circuitry that generates control signals and processes the Scope
inputs based on data keyed into the control panel.
NOTE: Three versions of Display Cards are available for the
Mark V and Mark V Plus. 78101-08-AP-04 and 7810108-AP-10 Display Cards (serial numbers less than
60000) are used only on the Mark V. Component designators for these cards are shown in parenthesis. The
78101-08-AP-11 Display Card (serial number 60000
and above) may be used with the Mark V or Mark V
Plus.

Refer to the block diagram in Figure 17.2.


Numeric Display
Drivers and
Numeric Displays

LED Driver,
Transistor Driver
and LEDs

Two groups of displays show the alphanumeric variables on the Control Panel. Each group consists of a display driver U17 (U1) and U16
(U2) and numeric display units. Display drivers also receive data and
address bus from display buffers U16 and U19 on the I/O Card, and
control lines from display decoder U1 on the I/O Card.

The group driven by U17 (U1) displays R-R seconds,


Delay seconds, and the number of boluses.

The group driven by U16 (U2) displays heart rate.

These control and drive the LEDs used as indicators and backlights of
words printed on the Control Panel. Display driver U15 (U3) controls
all LEDs. Each LED group contains transistor drivers such as Q1 and
Q2 on boards with serial numbers less than 60000, or IC driver U14
on boards with serial numbers 60000 and above. The three columns
of LEDs are enabled by Q7-Q9 (Q15-Q17), also driven by U15 (U3).
Additional functions of the Display Card include: Control Scope inputs
based on keyed entries from the Control Panel; Generate control lines
for other ECG and Scope circuits.

17 - 5

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Figure 17.2: Block Diagram: ECG/Scope Display Circuits

Function Manager

This circuit provides two types of control lines: Mode and Strobe.
Mode lines toggle a variety of conditions on or off, and make choices
that latch in a certain mode until toggled again. Strobe controls are
short duration, and are used to transfer a digital word from the data
bus to a selected chip for further processing. U11 (U6) provides only
Mode control lines; U13 (U7) provides a few Mode controls, and all
Strobe controls.
For a block diagram of the Function Manager, see Figure 17.3.
Mode controls include the following:
Input selection for the Scope channels.

17 - 6

Calibration deflection for both channels.

Sweep mode, either continuous or stopped. In the automatic mode, where the sweep starts and stops with the
injection, the processor toggles this output.

Sweep speed: 10, 25, or 50 mm/sec.

Clear the screen at the beginning of the injection in the


automatic sweep mode.

Intensify the trace at the time the injection is to start. This


is shown on the screen as an intensified spot.

Control the magnitude of the flow profile based on the


syringe size.

Enable the Scope display.

ECG/Scope Option
Function Manager
(cont.)

Four lines from U13 (U7) are decoded by U12 (U16) into the following
Strobe lines:
Gain and position of both Scope channels. These lines
transfer the bus to the selected multiplying DAC, thereby
controlling the attenuation or offset of the channels.

Control Panel display parameters. These lines transfer the


bus to one of the numeric display drivers, enabling the
Control Panel to display a processor value or condition.

Figure 17.3: Block Diagram: ECG/Scope Function Manager

Scope Input Control


For a block diagram of Scope Input Control, refer to Figure 17.4.
Channel 1
Input Control

Two inputs are presented to solid-state switch U10 (U5): The ECG
signal from the ISI Card, and Auxiliary input from J14 on the rear connector panel. The auxiliary input is internally connected to the BPO
200. The returning signal may be displayed on the Scope without
modifications. To select the BPO signal, select AUX1 with the BPO
200 connected.
The input choice is made by the state of the control line into U9 (U4),
which controls the switch U10 (U5). Selected input is presented to the
channel 1 gain and position network comprised of U1, U3, U5, U7
(U8-u11).

1 MV Calibration
Circuit

When the 1 MV CAL button on the Control Panel is pressed, a control


line turns on Q1 (Q18) and Q2 (Q19) to supply an offset voltage to the
ECG input. If the ECG input has been selected by switch U10 (U5),
the displayed wave-form will deflect the equivalent of 1 mV.

Channel 1
Gain Attenuator

U5 (U8) and U7 (U9) control the gain of channel 1 from the processor,
controlled by buttons on the Control Panel. Multiplying DAC U7 (U9)
attenuates the signal based on the digital word on the data bus when
latch U5 (U8) is strobed. The processor controls this action and the
resultant attenuation when the GAIN Up/Down buttons are pressed on
the Scope control panel.
17 - 7

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


Channel 1
Position Control

U3 (U10) and U1 (U11) control the position of channel 1 from the processor, controlled by buttons on the Control Panel. Multiplying DAC
U1 (U11) generates an offset signal based on the digital word on the
data bus when latch U3 (U10) is strobed. The processor controls this
action and the resultant attenuation when the POSITION Up/Down
buttons are pressed on the Scope control panel.

Figure 17.4: Block Diagram: Scope Input Control

Channel 2
Input Control

Two inputs are presented to solid-state switch U10 (U5): The injection
signal from the Scope Memory Card, and Auxiliary input from J14 on
the rear connector panel. Input choice is made by the state of the control line into U9 (U4), which controls the switch (U10) U5. The selected
input is presented to the channel 2 gain and position network comprised of U2, U4, U6, and U8 (U12-U15).

20 ML
Calibration Circuit

When the 20 ML CAL button is pressed on the Control Panel, a control line turns on Q6 (Q20) to supply an offset voltage to the injection
input. If the injection input has been selected by switch U10 (U5), the
displayed wave-form will deflect the equivalent of 20 ml. Since the
deflection factor is different for different sizes of syringes, Q3-Q5
(Q21) attenuates the signal when 60 or 200 ml syringes are selected.
NOTE: With EKD Cards series 60000 and above, switch S1 of
the ECG/Scope Control Panel Display Board must be
set in either the 60/150, or 150/200 position, for selection of the appropriate injection system.
NOTE: When the syringe size selected is changed, the 20 ML
CAL must be readjusted.

17 - 8

ECG/Scope Option
Channel 2
Gain Attenuator

U6 and U8 (U12 and U13) control the gain of channel 2 from the processor, controlled by buttons on the Control Panel. Multiplying DAC U8
(U13) attenuates the signal based on the digital word on the data bus
when latch U6 (U12) is strobed. The processor controls this action and
the resultant attenuation when the GAIN Up/Down buttons are pressed
on the Scope control panel.

Channel 2
Position Control

U4 and U2 (U14 and U15) control the position of channel 2 from the
processor, controlled by buttons on the Control Panel. Multiplying DAC
U2 (U15) generates an offset signal based on the digital word on the
data bus when latch (U4) U14 is strobed. The processor controls this
action and the resultant attenuation when the POSITION Up/Down buttons are pressed on the Scope control panel.
NOTE: When power is removed from the Scope unit, the 20 MV
CAL, 1 MV CAL, and Channel 1 and 2 positions will
return to the default values, thus requiring readjustment.
NOTE: When power is removed form either the entire system or
the ECG unit, the R-WAVE Gain will require readjustment.

Scope Memory Card


NOTE: Component designators shown for the CRM Main Card
drawings correspond directly to component designators
listed for the Scope Memory Card.
The Scope Memory Card contains circuits that generate, modify, store,
and control what is displayed on the Scope. The inputs to this card are
the signals to be displayed on the Scope channels. The outputs from
this card are sent to deflection circuits.

Input Processor
Receives signals from the Control Panel, and multiplexes them into one
channel for display and storage.
Memory Processor
Converts signals from analog into digital for storage, then back into analog for display.
Intensified Spot Circuit
Causes channel 1 to intensify at the start of the injection.
Clock and Sync Circuits
Generate timing and synchronization signals for the rest of the circuits.
Flow Profile Generator
Simulates the injection signal shown on channel 2.
17 - 9

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


Input Processor
This circuit receives the signals from the Control Panel and multiplexes them into one serial channel for display and storage. For a
block diagram of the Input Processor, refer to Figure 17.5.
Channel 1
Input Buffer

U8A receives the signal from the Display Card for channel 1. Input
selection is controlled by the Display Card. U8A output is presented to
bilateral switch U28, configured as a multiplexing switch.

Channel 2
Input Buffer

U8B receives the signal from the display board for channel 2. U8B
output is presented to multiplexing switch U28.

Input Multiplexer

Through U28, the signals from U8A and U8B are sent one at a time to
the A/D converter. Switching is controlled by signals from the sweep
interval timer. These control lines switch the two input channels at the
proper times for display and storage.

Figure 17.5: Block Diagram: Scope Input Processor

Memory Processor
These circuits convert the signals from analog to digital for storage,
then revert to analog for display. Refer to Figure 17.6.
A/D Converter

U27 converts the analog signal from the input processor into a proportional 8-bit digital word.

Memory

Digital data for both channels is stored in U25, a 2K RAM chip. Read/
Write signals from the sync circuits direct the flow of data into and out
of memory. When new data is not being read into registers, U25
retains the data already stored. When new data is written into memory, old data is erased. There are 1024 bits in each horizontal line.
Together, both traces use the entire 2K of memory.

17 - 10

ECG/Scope Option
DAC

U26 converts the digital word on the data bus into an analog voltage.

Buffer

The analog signal is buffered by U30, and supplied to the display


drive circuits, causing vertical deflection.

Read/Write Logic

The array comprised of U4, U19, U17 and associated components


provides Read/Write control signals to the memory. This circuit also
synchronizes the spot intensify memory.

Figure 17.6: Block Diagram: Scope Memory Processor

Intensified Spot Circuit


This circuit causes channel 1 to intensify at the start of the injection.
The intensity is confined to a small segment so that it appears as a
bright spot. This circuit contains its own memory so that the intensified
spot is stored and displayed with other data.
Refer to the block diagram in Figure 17.7.
Spot Pulse Generator

A signal from the Display Card triggers U7, sending a signal to Read/
Write logic at the precise time the spot is to occur. The trigger pulse is
30 msec.

Read/Write Logic

The array comprised of U4, U19, U17 and associated components


provides Read/Write control signals to the spot memory and spot
writer.

Spot Writer

When the intensified spot is to occur, driver U14 is enabled by the


Read/Write logic. This sends data to the spot memory for storage and
to the inverters for display.

Spot Memory

U24 is a 2K RAM chip dedicated to the intensified spot. It stores the


location of the intensified spot. Since U24 shares the address bus with
the main memory U25, the location of the spot will be in sync with the
location of the traces.
17 - 11

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


Inverters

Both the inverted and non-inverted spot intensify signals are sent to the
Display Card. The signals control the display brightness to increase
brightness at the time designated for the intensified spot.

Figure 17.7: Block Diagram: Scope Intensified Spot Circuit


Clock and Sync Circuits
This collection of circuits generates the timing and synchronization signals for the remainder of the circuits.
For a block diagram of the Clock and Sync Circuits, refer to Figure 17.8.
Master Clock

U1 generates a 4 MHz square wave. The rate of the clock signal out of
U3 is determined by the sweep speed selected on the Control Panel.
This clock signal synchronizes the Read/Write activities to the horizontal sweep.

Sweep Speed Control

The Display Card defines the speed selected on the Control Panel.
These inputs are used by U8C and U8D to control the horizontal sweep
integrator.

Horizontal Sweep
Generator

This circuit generates the sawtooth wave-form used to cause horizontal


sweeping. The rate of U9 integration depends on the input resistance,
selected by the FETs in the sweep speed control. During blanking, Q3
turns on and shunts C20 for retrace.

Sweep Interval Timer

The array comprised of U10-U12 manages the frames displayed on the


screen. Read/Write logic and the input processor are synchronized by
this circuit to control data movement in and out of memory.

Blanking Pulse
Generator

When the Scope is to retrace, the blanking pulse from U16 removes
power from the display, and resets the horizontal sweep generator.
When the sweep is to begin, display and horizontal sweep generator
are enabled.

Memory Address
Counter

The array comprised of U21-23 generates the address information for


memory, and coordinates the addressing so that the channel data fills
all memory locations sequentially.

17 - 12

ECG/Scope Option
Sweep Mode Control

A signal from the Display Card indicates the sweep mode selected on the
Control Panel. This is used to control the Read/Write functions of the
Scope Memory Card through U15, U19, and U29.
Although only two control lines are shown, three modes can be selected:
CONTinuous mode
The data being displayed is continuously updated. New information is
added to the right side of the display as the tracings move to the left,
giving the appearance of a continuous wave-form.
STOP mode
The display is frozen, with the data being recirculated in memory. No
new data will be written into memory or displayed.
AUTOmatic mode
Under processor control; In this mode the sweep erases and starts at
the beginning of the injection when the start switch is closed. The
sweep stops 0.25 seconds after the injection ends. The processor
does this by switching between the STOP and CONTinuous modes.

Erase Pulse
Generator

In the automatic sweep mode, U7 generates an erase pulse that clears


the screen at the start of an injection.

Figure 17.8: Block Diagram: Scope Clock and Sync Circuits


17 - 13

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


Flow Profile Generator
This circuit generates the injection signal shown on channel 2 when
INJ is selected at the Control Panel. Refer to Figure 17.9.
Flow Selected Buffer

U20A prevents loading down the flow selected signal from the DAC
on the Servo Control Card.

Integrator Control

During standby, and when the flow selected is less than 1 ml/sec, this
circuit prevents U20C from integrating.

Comparator

Normally the Flow Selected signal is passed on to the integrator without any problems. However, if pressure limiting occurs, the signal will
be attenuated until the flow profile matches the actual Flow Rate.

Integrator

U20C generates a flow profile ramp that is proportional to the Flow


Rate selected. The output returns to the Display Card. When INJ is
selected on the Control Panel, this signal will be displayed on channel
2 during simulated and actual injections.

Figure 17.9: Block Diagram: Scope Flow Profile Generator

17 - 14

ECG/Scope Option
Scope Deflection Card
NOTE: Component designators shown on the CRM Main Card
with a 3XX prefix correspond directly to component
designators listed for the Scope Deflection Card.
The circuits on this card control drive to the Scope tube, including horizontal and vertical deflection, brightness, focus, tilt, and astigmatism.
Refer to the block diagram in Figure 17.10.
CRT

The CRT is a rectangular, flat-faced design, with a diagonal measurement of 14 cm. The tube uses electrostatic focusing and deflection.

Horizontal Deflection
Amplifier

This circuit uses the horizontal sweep signal from the Scope Memory
Card to produce horizontal deflection of the trace. Deflection occurs
because of the potential difference between the deflection plates,
driven by Q1 and Q2. The beam will deflect toward the more positive
plate.

Vertical Deflection
Amplifier

This circuit uses the vertical signal from the Scope Memory Card to
produce vertical deflection of the trace. Deflection occurs because of
the potential difference between the deflection plates, driven by Q5
and Q6. The beam will deflect toward the more positive plate.

Constant Current
Regulator

Q9 provides a fixed control current to the horizontal and vertical


deflection amplifiers. This produces symmetrical amplifier output.

Brightness and
Focus Control

The brightness control R33 sets the voltage on the control grid of the
CRT. As the wiper moves away from -2 KV DC, the trace gets brighter.
The focus control R30 sets the voltage on the focusing grid of the
CRT.

Spot Intensify Drive

To intensify the trace, the inverted spot intensify signal turns on Q11 to
pulse the control grid of the CRT with a positive voltage. This causes
the trace to be extremely bright for the pulse duration. At the same
time, the spot intensify signal (non-inverted) turns on Q12 to pulse the
focusing grid so that the spot stays sharp.

Blanking Drive

The Memory Card blanking signal activates Q13, placing a negative


voltage on the control grid, while the horizontal sweep is retracing.

Tilt Control

R23 varies the current and polarity through the tilt coil, affecting trace
rotation.

Astigmatism
Compensator

This circuit compensates for trace astigmatism. Astigmatism is trace


distortion that produces ovals rather than dots.

17 - 15

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Figure 17.10: Block Diagram: Scope Deflection Card

17 - 16

ECG/Scope Option
Scope Power Supply Card
NOTE: Component designators shown on the CRM Main Card
with a 2XX prefix correspond directly to component designators listed for the Scope Power Supply Card.
This card supplies the following voltages for the Scope drive circuits and
the Display tube:
+2 KV DC to the tubes final accelerator anode

-2 KV DC to the blanking drive, brightness, and focus circuits

+150 VDC to the horizontal and vertical deflection amplifiers

+6 VDC filament power to the CRT

Refer to the block diagram in Figure 17.11.


Oscillator

U2 generates a square wave to switch the transformer driver on and off.


The amplitudes of the output voltages are determined by oscillator frequency, which is controlled by the comparator.

Transformer Driver

The square wave from U2 turns Q4 on and off, causing a rapid change
in current in the transformer primary.

Transformer

When Q4 turns on, the current through the T1 transformer primary


builds up a magnetic field. When Q4 turns off, the magnetic field collapses and the primary develops a high voltage flyback pulse. With a
high transformer turns ratio, large voltage pulses are developed in the
secondary during the flyback period.

Voltage Doubler

This network doubles the voltage from the center-tapped winding of the
transformer. The output from the doubler has a peak amplitude of
approximately +2 KV DC.

High Voltage Filters

These R-C filter networks minimize ripple on the high voltage line.

Filament Rectifier
and Filters

A half-wave rectifier filters the filament supply from the flyback transformer secondary. This supply, approximately 6 VDC, is used only by
the CRT filament.

+150 VDC
Rectifier and Filter

A half-wave rectifier filters the +150 VDC supply from the transformer
secondary. This voltage feeds through the memory card to the deflection card, powering the horizontal and vertical deflection amplifiers.

Comparator

Comparator U1 controls the oscillator frequency to regulate the output


voltage. If the output falls below the desired levels, frequency increases
to raise the output. If the output tends to increase, frequency decreases
to lower output.

17 - 17

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Figure 17.11: Block Diagram: Scope Power Supply Card

17 - 18

Troubleshooting Guide

19

Troubleshooting
Guide
The following tools and test equipment may be needed to service a
Mark V or Mark V Plus system, depending on what is being disassembled or removed. Each procedure in this section specifies which tools
are required for that procedure.

Required Tools

Required Test
Equipment

Medium-blade screwdriver

Small-blade screwdriver

3/8 (10 mm) wrench or pliers (for syringe heater replacement)

1/16 (1.5 mm) hex wrench (for head indicator cards)

5/32 (4 mm) hex wrench (for head knuckle; for turret limit
switch replacement)

Pin extractor (for power transformer connector, line voltage


conversion, Syringe Heater and Injector Head Cables)

Alignment tool (or very small screwdriver)

Soldering iron (25 to 60 watts) and solder

Needle-nose pliers

Wire cutters

Alcohol and swabs (to clean card edge connectors)

Cable Ties

Digital voltmeter (DVM) (Fluke 87 or True RMS equivalent)

Oscilloscope (for minor troubleshooting and calibration;


not for major repairs) (Tektronix 465 or equivalent)

Leakage Tester (for checking line leakage and ECG input


leakage)

Stopwatch or Timer

ECG Simulator (ECG/Scope units only)

KSP 591(which contains the following):

78-pin cable connector (for Control Unit chassis


and power chassis). Required for Mark V Pedestal
only. Medrad part number 78101-01-AC-03

19 - 1

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


Required Test
Equipment (cont.)

KSP 591 (cont.)

Chassis card extender (for cards in Control Unit) Medrad part number 78101-10-AP-50
25-pin card/cable extender (for Power Supply and
Mechanical Stop cards)
Medrad part number 78101-01-AC-04
37-pin card/cable extender (for Power Drive Card) Medrad part number 78101-01-AC-05
Service Access CardMedrad part number 85106-05-AP-01
Portable Digital Timer Medrad part number KSP-141
Pressure Gauge Assembly Medrad part number KSP-135

NOTE: To verify proper operation of the Mark V or Mark V


Plus, refer to Section 5.

19 - 2

Troubleshooting Guide

Replacement Parts
This section contains a list of suggested spare parts and instructions
for identification and ordering
Suggested Spare
Parts

Applicable to all Mark V and Mark V Plus injection systems.

Item
Medrad Part Number
CPU Card
78101-10-AP-14-3
Input/Output Card (I/O)
78101-10-AP-02
Pre-Programmed Injection Card (PPI)
78101-10-AP-06
Servo Control Card (SCC)
78101-10-AP-03-1
Imaging System Interface Card (ISI)
78101-10-AP-16
Mechanical Stop Card(MSD)
78101-04-AP-05
Power Supply Card(PSP)
78101-07-AP-03
Remote Panel Controller Card (RPCP)
85102-15-AP-01-3
Keyboard Display Card (KDC)
78101-05-AP-02
Turret, pin with O-ring
KSP-105
Syringe heater
KSP-509
Plunger Feedback Pot Assembly
KSP-513
Mechanical Stop Feedback Pot Assembly KSP-514
Limit switch kit, Mechanical Stop
78101-04-SK-07
Start switch
450-1010-000
Start switch housing
KSP-550
Cord reel, start switch
KSP-521
Cord reel, film changer
KSP-522
Power switch, 100-125VAC
KSP-523
Power switch, 200-250VAC
KSP-524
Film changer relay
KSP-527
Fuse, 1/16 A pico
476-0062-000
Fuse, 1/8 A pico
476-0125-000
Fuse, 3 A pico
476-0275-003
Fuse, 10 A pico
476-0275-010
Fuse, 5x20 5 A
476-2180-005
Fuse, 5x20 3.15 A
476-2173-150
Caster with brake
699-4645-100
Caster without brake
699-4845-100
Mark V Injection Systems (20000 series units)
PDC Card (Specify 50 or 60 Hz)
Drive Relay Card (DRC)
Injector Head Card Indicator Group
Pressure Jacket, 150 ml
Turret, 150
Pressure Jacket, 200 ml
Turret, 200 ml
Injector Head Cable Assembly
Limit Switch, Injector Head Turret

78101-06-AP-06
85106-04-AP-02
78101-04-AM-04
KMP-777
KMA-150
KMP-778
KMA-200
KSP-543
445-0004-100

19 - 3

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


Suggested Spare
Parts (cont.)

Lamp, Injector Head Armed Indicators


KSP-573
Piston Rotation Lever (S/N 5343 and below) KSP-560
Piston Rotation Lever (S/N 5344 and above)KSP-760
Injector Head Top Scale Overlay
KSP-564

Mark V Plus Injection Systems (60000 series units)

Item
Medrad Part Number
PDCP Card(Specify 50 or 60 Hz)
78101-06-AP-09
Drive Relay Card (DRC)
85106-04-AP-02
Pressure Jacket, 200 ml
KMP-778
Pressure Jacket, 150 ml
KMP-777
Pressure Jacket, 60 ml
KMP-760
Turret, 60/150
KMA-615
Turret, Dual 150
KMA-150P
Turret, Dual 200
KMA-200P
Head Cable Assembly 6 (shielded)
KSP-743-2
Lamp, Injector Head Armed Indicator (kit) KSP-703
Piston Rotation Lever
KSP-760
Injector Head Top Overlay(60/150)
KSP-764 (English)
KSP-764-2(German)
Injector Head Top Overlay(150/200)
KSP-964-1(English)
KSP-964-2(German)

Mark V Plus Multinational Injection Systems (70000 series units)

Item
Medrad Part Number
PDCI Card(Specify 50 or 60 Hz)
78101-06-AP-10
Drive Relay Card (DRCI)
85106-04-AP-03
Pressure Jacket, 200 ml
KMP-778
Pressure Jacket, 150 ml
KMP-777
Pressure Jacket, 60 ml
KMP-760
Turret, 60/150
KMA-615
Turret, Dual 150
KMA-150P
Turret, Dual 200
KMA-200P
Head Cable Assembly 6 (shielded)
KSP-743-2
Lamp, Injector Head Armed Indicator (kit) KSP-703
Piston Rotation Lever
KSP-760
Injector Head Top Overlay(60/150)
KSP-764 (English)
KSP-764-2(German)
Injector Head Top Overlay(150/200)
KSP-964-1(English)
KSP-964-2(German)

19 - 4

Troubleshooting Guide

System Interchangeability Information (U.S. / Domestic)

System Interchangeablity Information (U.S./Domestic)

19 - 5

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Power Drive Card Interchangeability

Power Drive Card Interchangeability


Mark V
1000
series

20000
series

Mark V Plus
6000065511

65512
and up

Mark V Plus
70000 series

MCT
30000 series

MCT Plus
40000 series

MCT Plus
50000 series

Mark V ProVis
90K

PDC
PDCP (+)
PDCI
78101-06-AP-10

PDCI
3010341

PDR
DRC
DRCI

CPU Card Interchangeability


Mark V
1000

Mark V
20000

Mark V Plus
60K / 70K

Mark V
ProVis

MCT
30000

MCT Plus
40K / 50K

Mark V
20000

Mark V Plus
60K / 70K

Mark V
ProVis

MCT
30000

MCT Plus
40K / 50K

Mark V Plus
60K / 70K

Mark V
ProVis

MCT
30000

MCT Plus
40K / 50K

1000
78101-10-AP-01

20000 27466
78101-10-AP-01

27467 and up
78101-10-AP-14

10000
3003541

PPI Card Interchangeability


Mark V
1000
1000
78101-10-AP-01

20000 25665
78101-10-AP-06

25666 and up
78101-10-AP-14

10000
3002953

PSC - PSP Card Interchangeability


Mark V
1000

Mark V
20000

PSC
PSP

X = can be used with this injector system


+ if used in a 20000 series card jumper moved from 1-2 to 2-3

19 - 6

100 K
and up

Troubleshooting Guide

Replacement Circuitry
The following parts are necessary for proper circuit operation. These
parts must be supplied by Medrad. Do not make substitutions from
other manufacturers due to possible incompatibility with Mark V / Mark
V Plus circuits. Not all boards are interchangeable between Mark V
and Mark V Plus units.
CPU Card

Designator

Description

Medrad Part No.

(CPU Card part number 78101-10-AP-01), revision E and above


U1
MC14528
004-4528-000
U2
Z8581(D82C284-8) 070-8581-000 (070-8228-480)
U10
Z80A (CPU)
070-8400-000
U11
ROM
M5JA11 XXXXXX *
U12
ROM
M5JA12 XXXXXX *
U13
ROM
M5JA13 XXXXXX *
U14
ROM
M5JA14 XXXXXX *
U15
ROM
M5JA15 XXXXXX *
U16
RAM
071-8464-000
U22
PLA
M5JA22
U23
PLA
M5JA23
Y2
8.0 MHz Crystal
180-0080-000
(CPU Card part number 78101-10-AP-14), revision B and above
U2
Z8581
070-8581-000
U2
D82C284-8
070-8228-480 **
U10
Z80A (CPU)
070-8400-000
U24
ROM
M5JA24 XXXXXX
U16
RAM
071-8464-000
U26
PLA
M5JA26
U23
PLA
M5JA23
Y2
8.0 MHz Crystal
180-0080-000
*NOTE: ROM chips U11-U15 should all indicate the same software version. For example, if version M5JAXXMV7.0 is
being used, all ROM chips should be MV 7.0. Contact
Medrad Factory Service for detailed information on software version interchangeability and compatibility with
Remote Panel software.

**

For use in CPU Cards with serial numbers above 32600.

19 - 7

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


Replacement Circuitry (cont.)
Designator

Description

Medrad Part No.

I/0 Card (IOC)

U4
U5, U6
U8

Z8430APS (CTC)
Z8420APS (PIO)
PLA

070-8430-000
070-8420-000
M5JB8

Servo Control Card


(SCC)

U1
U16
U21-U24
U26, U27
U29

AD571 (A/D)
Z8420APS (PIO)
NE5018 (D/A)
4741
3527A

050-0571-000
070-8420-000
053-5018-000
060-4741-500
050-3527-070

PPI Card

Revision B and below


BT1-BT3
3.0 V Battery
U7
PLA
U8
PLA
U9-U12
M88416A-15L (RAM)
Y1
4.9152 MHz Crystal

497-2325-000
M5JD7
M5JD8
071-8416-000
180-0049-000

Revision C and above


BT1
3.0 V Battery
U6
PLA
U8, U9
TC5564-PL15
Y1
3.6864 MHz Crystal

497-2325-100
M5JD6
071-5564-015
180-0037-000

Power Drive Card


(PDC)

U1-U4

4741

060-4741-500

Power Drive Card


Plus (PDCP / PDCI)

U4, U5
U1, U2
U3

4741
LF444
REF01

060-4741-500
052-0444-000
052-4101-000

Mechanical Stop
Card (MSD)

U2

LM324

050-0324-050

Power Supply Card


(PSC or PSP)

L1
L1
U1

35 mH Choke
39 mH Choke
UC3527

78101-07-AM-01 *
78101-07-AM-02 **
050-3527-000

*
**

19 - 8

For 78101-07-AP-01 Assembly only


For 78101-07-AP-03 Assembly only

Troubleshooting Guide
Replacement Circuitry (cont.)
Remote Panel
Controller Card
(RPC or RPCP)

Designator
U2
U5
U12
U13
U14
U15
U16
U17
Y1
U6
Y1
U6
Y2
T1
L1

Description
PIO
CTC
PLA
CPU
RAM
ROM
ROM
3537
3.684 MHz Crystal
Clock Generator
1.843 MHz Crystal
Clock Generator
8 MHz Crystal
Transformer
47 mH Choke

Medrad Part No.


070-8420-000
070-8430-000
RP5B12A
070-8400-000
071-8464-000
RP5B15XXXXXX *
RP5B16XXXXXX *
050-3527-000
180-0080-020
070-8581-000
012-1843-200
070-8228-480
180-0037-000
85102-01-101 **
270-4334-040 ***

RPC or RPCP #45240 and below


RPC or RPCP #45241 and above
** 85102-01-AP-01 Assembly only
*** 85102-01-AP-02 Assembly only

* NOTE: ROM chips U15 and U16 should indicate the same
software version. For example, RP5B15 and RP5B16
must both indicate the same software versions,
RPB15MVR7.0 and RPB16MVR7.0, respectively. Contact Medrad Service for information on software version compatibility with Control Unit system software.
Keyboard Display
Card (KDC)

U1-4
DS1-8
DS9-22

7218
DL1414
7 Segment Display
(single digit)

072-7218-000
485-1414-000
485-5082-000

DS23,24

7 Segment Display
(four digit)

485-4770-000 *

DS23-30

7 Segment Display
(single digit)

485-7503-000 **

LP1-11,13,17 HLMP 2350


LP18-21
HLMP 2300

485-2350-000
485-2300-000

* 78101-05-AP-01 Assembly only


** 78101-05-AP-02 Assembly only

Injector Head

For all injector head parts, refer to the drawings in Section 14. Injector
head parts should be obtained only from Medrad.
19 - 9

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

How to Order Parts


Order Mark V / Mark V Plus parts from Medrad Factory Service:
Medrad Factory Service
MEDRAD, INC.
One Medrad Drive
Indianola, PA 15051-0780
Phone: (412) 767-2400
1-800-MEDRAD-S
1-800-633-7237
FAX: (412) 767-4126
In Europe:
MEDRAD EUROPE, B.V.
Postbus 3084
6202 NB Maastricht
The Netherlands
Phone: (31) (0) 43 3585600
FAX: (31) (0) 43 3650020
In Japan:
Nihon MEDRAD K.K.
M&N Building 6F
1-4-2 Nishimiyahara
Yodogawa-ku
Osaka 532
Japan
Phone: (81) (0) 66 350-0680
FAX: (81) (0) 66 398-0670

When ordering, include the following information:

Injector model and Serial Number

Subassembly the part is used on, Serial Number,


and Revision Level

Circuit designator, Description of item,


and Medrad part number

Quantity desired

Example:
Injector:
Subassembly:
Description:
Quantity:

19 - 10

Mark V, Serial Number 516-1234


Servo Control Card, Serial No. 1234, Rev B
U22, NE5018, 053-5018-000
1

Troubleshooting Guide

Service Access Card


The Service Access Card (for use only with CRC and RMT systems) is inserted in the spare slot on the right side of the Console,
providing easy access to test points for troubleshooting and testing. All signals are clearly marked on the card next to the test
points. See Figure 19.1.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

OVR. CUR. REF.


OVR. CUR. SHTDWN
PLUNG. POS.
FWD./REV. IND.*
ERROR SIG.
MSPOS
TURLIMSW
MECH. STOP MOT.
MECH. STOP MOT.
BMSPOSCMD
10V REF.
DIG. VELOCITY
ANA. VELOCITY
SAFRELO
INJ. START

30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16

+26v *
AUX. MONITOR *
SYSTEM OVERRIDE *
ARM LT. ENABLE *
F/C START *
150/200 ENABLE *
FLOW SELECTED
PLNG. MOT. VOLTS LOW
MVOLTS
+5V
-15V
+15V
A.G.
INJECT
INJECTING

Figure 19.1: Test Points on Service Access Card

* These Test Points are located on motherboards labeled MBR


2XXXX, and all motherboards manufactured after November,
1991. Test Point 4 on all motherboards manufactured prior to
this date was reserved for future use, contained no connection, and was labeled SYS. MON. PRESSURE.

19 - 11

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


SAC Test Points

The following information refers to the test points on the Service Access
Card. The measurement should be within 10% of the values given
below. Values are with reference to analog ground, test point 18, unless
otherwise specified.

Test Point / Description

Typical Values

OVR. CUR. REF.


Overcurrent Reference

-6 VDC at all times.

OVR. CUR. SHTDWN


Overcurrent Shutdown

+14 VDC at any status


14 VDC during overcurrent
shutdown, and then only briefly at
the onset of a high Flow Rate
injection in the 150 ml mode.

PLNG. POS.
Buffered Plunger Position

+0.25 - +9.60 VDC, depending on


plunger position.

4 * FWD. REV. IND.


Fwd. or Rev. Indications

Standby = 5 VDC
Fwd activated = 0 VDC
Rev activated = 0 VDC

ERROR SIG.
Error Signal

Standby/Loading=0
Between zero and +15 VDC during
an injection. Less than +6 VDC
during most injections.

MSPOS
Buffered Mech. Stop Pos.

+0.25 +/- 9.60 VDC, depending


on Mechanical Stop position.

TURLIMSW
Turret Limit Switch

+24 VDC when turret in place and


the Mechanical Stop is not
engaged. Zero when the turret is out
of position or the stop is engaged.

MECH. STOP MOT.


+24 VDC during standby; zero to
Mechanical Stop Motor (+) +24 VDC (switching) when the
Mechanical Stop is moving in
reverse. Zero when armed, the
stop is moving forward, +24 VDC
when the stop is positioned.

* These Test Points are located on motherboards labeled MBR 2XXXX,


and all motherboards manufactured after November, 1991. Test
Point 4 on all motherboards manufactured prior to this date was
reserved for future use, contained no connection, and was labeled
SYS. MON. PRESSURE.

19 - 12

Troubleshooting Guide
Test Point / Description
9

MECH. STOP MOT.


Mechanical Stop motor (-)

Typical Values
-24 VDC during standby; zero when
the Mechanical Stop is moving in
reverse; may oscillate as stop is
positioned; stays at zero when stop
is positioned; -24 VDC when disarmed.

10 BMSPOSCMD
Measure the same as test point 6
Buffered M/S Position CMD when the Mechanical Stop is not
moving.
11 10V REF.
+10 VDC Reference

+10.0 +0.1 VDC.

12 DIG. VELOCITY
Digital Velocity

+0.1 VDC/ml (+4.0 VDC at 40 ml/sec).

13 ANA. VELOCITY
Analog Velocity

+0.15 V/ml (+6.0 VDC at 40 ml/sec).

14 SAFRELO
Safe Relay Low

+24 VDC when disarmed and not


loading; less than +2 VDC when
armed, injecting, or loading.

15 INJ. START
Inject Start

+5 VDC when start switch open; 0 to


+0.1 VDC when start switch closed.

16 INJECTING
Injecting

Zero during standby; +5 VDC when


injecting; immediately returns to zero
at injection end - no delay.

17 INJECT
Inject

Zero during standby; +15 VDC when


injecting; should stay at +15 VDC for
two seconds after the end of the
injection, then return to zero. With
ECG injections, stays high for one
second at end of injection.

18 A.G.
Analog Ground

Reference for other test point grounds.

19 +15V

+15 +/- 0.5 VDC.

20 -15V

-15 +/- 0.5 VDC.

21 +5V
.
22 MVOLTS
Motor Volts

+5 +/- 0.25 VDC


Injecting, 0 - +90 VDC, depending on
speed. During forward load, typically
measures 7-15 VDC. Reverse load less than 0 VDC.
19 - 13

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


Test Point / Description
23 PLNG. MOT. VOLTS LOW
Plunger Motor VDC Low Side

Less than 1 VDC while injecting


or forward load. +1 VDC with
1200 PSI. Reverse load 7-15
VDC.

24 FLOW SELECTED
Flow Selected

Measure in ml/sec - 60 ml
syringe, +0.38 VDC/ml. 150 ml
syringe, +0.16 VDC/ml (+6.4
VDC at 40 ml/sec). 200 ml
syringe, +0.12 VDC (+4.8 VDC
at 40 ml/sec). In ml/min or ml/hr,
less than 0.2 VDC.

25 * 150/200 ENABLE
150/200 Enable

60 ml = 5 VDC
150 ml = 0 VDC
200 ml = 5 VDC

26 * F/C START
Film Changer Start

F/C Relay Open = 26 VDC


F/C Relay Closed = 0 VDC

27 * ARM LT. ENABLE


Arm Light Enable

Light off = 0 VDC


Light on = 5 VDC
Flashing = Pulses 0 to 5 VDC

28 * SYSTEM OVERRIDE
System Override

Standby = 0 VDC
Active state = 5 VDC

29 * AUX MONITOR
Aux. Monitor

Standby = -14 VDC


Active state = 13 VDC

30 * +26V

+26 VDC

19 - 14

Typical Values

These Test Points are located on motherboards labeled MBR


2XXXX, and all motherboards manufactured after November,
1991. Test Point 4 on all motherboards manufactured prior to this
date was reserved for future use, contained no connection, and
was labeled SYS. MON. PRESSURE.

Troubleshooting Guide

Mark V / Mark V Plus


Troubleshooting Guide
This section is a guide in tracking a condition to a board or subassembly. The first segment covers general troubleshooting guidelines, applicable to most conditions.
Most conditions will prompt a message to appear on the Sentinel. Using
these messages, the condition can often be identified quickly. The second segment of this Troubleshooting Guide aids the user in determining
the source of a condition when a message does appear on the Sentinel.
The last segment of this section is useful in determining the source of a
condition when no message appears on the Sentinel.
For disassembly procedures, refer to Section 20, Unit Disassembly and
Reassembly.
WARNING: Hazardous voltages exist within the Mark V and
Mark V Plus Injection Systems that can shock, burn, or
cause death. To avoid injury, the system should be opened
and serviced by qualified service personnel only. Disconnect
the system from line power before cleaning or attempting to
perform any maintenance

WARNING: Immediately disconnect the patient from the


injector if any system malfunction occurs. If a system malfunction message appears, do not attempt to use the system
until the source of the condition has been identified and corrected by qualified service personnel. Do not attempt to recreate any fault conditions while connected to a patient.
CAUTION: Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). Failure to follow
ESD protection practices may result in equipment damage.
ESD protection practices must be followed when servicing
any component of this system.

Contents of this Section


General Troubleshooting Guidelines
Message Faults
Non-Message Faults

Page #
19 - 16
19 - 19
19 - 45

19 - 15

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


General Guidelines

Consider the following guidelines before troubleshooting any condition. These guidelines may help in resolving the condition quickly:
Remember, try the simple things first.
1. Disconnect the injector from external equipment: Disconnect all
cables connected to the injector, including those for the film
changer, monitor, or external start switch.
2. To verify the existence of a condition, check injector operations
before troubleshooting, using the Checkout Procedure in Chapter
5 of this manual. Follow the steps that pertain to the major functions of the unit to verify the condition.
3. Remove power for one minute. Allow the unit to reset completely,
then reapply power and retry. The condition could be intermittent,
or caused by a voltage transient. If the condition persists, continue
troubleshooting.
4. Open the Control Unit to remove/re-seat the cards. In a Pedestal
System, pull out the chassis, then lift out the card retainer. In a
Control Room Console, remove the card retainers. Remove each
circuit card. While the cards are out, ensure that the socketed ICs
are fully inserted. Reseat the cards, ensuring that the cards are
fully inserted into the connectors on the Mother Board. Replace
the card retainers. In Pedestal Systems, open the pedestal column door, and repeat this process with the cards in the Power
Chassis.
5. The Mark V / Mark V Plus is equipped with self-diagnostic software. A combination of safety circuits and software, provide the
Mark V / Mark V Plus with a diagnostic package that detects performance degradation, as well as total failures of portions of the
system. Through Sentinel messages, the Mark V / Mark V Plus
indicates self-diagnosed failures.
6. Any Sentinel message can symbolize a fault within the system.
For example, if the Sentinel displays CHECK TURRET, when the
turret is properly positioned, there may be a defective limit switch
in the head. Watch for messages that contradict the obvious.
7. Some faults can be caused by a noisy electrical environment. For
example, a memory error can be caused by a momentary power
failure or drop, electrical noise in the power line, or noise in external interfaces.
8. Check power supplies at the Power Supply Card.
9. Always troubleshoot in a logical sequence. Trace a condition
along the circuit paths in the unit, isolating the condition to a card
or circuit section. This process is shown on the next page.

19 - 16

Troubleshooting Guide
10. If the system is equipped with an ECG and Scope, signals travel
from the options into the Main Unit. Disconnect the options as follows to determince if the problem source is within the ECG/Scope
section:
Disconnect the power cable connecting the Motherboard
and scope Power Supply.

Disconnect the ribbon cable connecting the ECG/Scope


Display Card and the I/O Card.

Disconnect the cable connecting the Scope Display Card


and the Motherboard.

11. For assistance in determining the cause of a condition, or in


obtaining replacement cards, subassemblies, and parts, contact
Medrad Factory Service or your local dealer.
12. Check injector operations after repairs to ensure that the condition
has been corrected. Follow the Checkout Procedure outlined in
Section 5.

19 - 17

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Suggested Troubleshooting Sequence


When a condition occurs, observe the Sentinel message code or
symptom, and determine if the condition is being caused by the Control or Injection group of circuits. Isolate the condition to a board or
boards, replace the board(s) or troubleshoot to component level. See
Figure 19.2 below.

1. Condition
2. Message or Symptom
3. Circuit Groups
Control Group

Injection Group

CPU Card
I/O Card
Servo Control Card
(Digital Portion)
PPI Card
Display Card

Servo Control Card


(Analog Portion)
Power Drive Card
Mechanical Stop

4. Circuit Board
5. Circuit

Figure 19.2: Suggested Troubleshooting Sequence

19 - 18

Troubleshooting Guide

Message Faults
This section is a guide in the interpretation of messages displayed on
the Sentinel. An alphabetical listing of all Sentinel messages follows,
with a functional explanation and if applicable, possible solutions to
the condition.
Messages preceeded by two asterisks (**) are critical faults, which
cause the Mark V / Mark V Plus to cease functioning until the fault is
cleared.

CAUTION: If the SENTINEL displays a system monitor


type condition, do not attempt to use the injector until the
source of the condition is determined and resolved. Equipment damage or malfunction may result.

The Mark V / Mark V Plus performs self diagnostic tests during powerup. If the injector fails any of these tests, an error message will be displayed on the Sentinel containing details of the fault.

Messages

ACTIVATE A FUNCTION
An attempt was made to enter a value without first activating an injector function. Press a Delta button before pressing any number buttons.
ACTIVATE FLOW RATE FIRST (Mark V - MV 4.0 and below)
Both Volume and Injection Duration were set before setting the Flow
Rate. Set the Flow Rate first.
ADVANCE TO MAX LEVEL, THEN ARM
An attempt was made to arm at an intermediate level in a multiplelevel injection. Advance to the highest level, then arm the unit.
ALL PPI PROGRAM NUMBERS USED
There are no injection storage positions available in the PPI Memory.
Review all stored programs, and delete those seldom or never used.
AIR REMOVED FROM XXX SYRINGE? (MV 6.3 and above)
This message appears when either the SINGLE or MULTIple arm button is pressed to begin the arming sequence.
Procedure:
1. Verify that there is no air in the syringe.
2. If the syringe is free of air bubbles, and the injection compressed, press YES.
3. If the syringe contains any air, press NO.

19 - 19

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


ARE THE SELECTED VALUES OK? (Mark V - MV 4.0 and below)
Displayed as the second step in the arming sequence.
Procedure:
1. Verify the injection parameters are correct.
2. If parameters are correct, press YES.
3. If changes are required, press NO.
ARITH OVERFLOW IN FLOW CALC
This could be caused by a software condition or a fault in the system
memory. Temporarily remove power from the injector, then reapply
power and retry.
Service Procedure:
1. If the condition persists, replace the CPU Card.
CALL MEDRAD SERVICE
Remove power from the injector for 10 seconds, reapply power, then
attempt to operate the unit again.
If the condition persists:
A non-operator correctable system monitor condition has
occurred which requires assistance from the Medrad Service department.
CAN NOT ROLL THE LEVEL DOWN
The LEVEL DOWN button was pressed with the injector at injection
level 1. Press the LEVEL UP button to advance to other injection levels.
CHANGE FLOW SCALE? YES/NO
The Delta 3 button (Flow Scale) has been pressed. Press YES to
change the Flow Scale. Press NO to return to present operations.
CHECK INJ HEAD CABLE MS (Mark V - MV 4.0 and below)
**CHECK INJ HEAD CABLE MS (MV 6.3 and above)
The feedback signal from the Mechanical Stop pot (in the head) is not
within allowable limits.
Procedure:
1a. (Mark V Plus Injector Head only)
Observe the VOLUME REMAINING Display on the injector
head: - If the value displayed is zero, or in extreme reverse
position (beyond 63, 150 or 200 ml), the plunger may be
jammed; see step 6 below. - If the indicator is between the
limits of travel, continue with step 2 below.

19 - 20

Troubleshooting Guide
1b. (Mark V head only)
Observe the Mechanical Stop position indicator on the injector head:
If the indicator is at the extreme forward position
(beyond zero), it may be jammed; see step 6 below.
If the indicator is against the plunger indicator, the
plunger plate may be jammed; see step 6 below.
If the indicator is between zero and the plunger position, continue with step 2.
2. Check the injector head cable and connectors for broken or
intermittent connections.
3. If the condition persists, check the injector head for broken
connections or an open Mechanical Stop pot.
4. If the condition persists, replace the Servo Control Card.
5. Replace the Mechanical Stop card.
6. The Mechanical Stop plate may be jammed. Remove the
bottom cover of the head and attempt to move the belt manually.
7. If the condition persists, or if the Mechanical Stop cannot be
manually moved, replace the injector head.
CHECK INJ HEAD CABLE PL (Mark V - MV 4.0 and below)
**CHECK INJ HEAD CABLE PL (MV 6.3 and above)
The feedback signal from the Plunger Position Pot is not within allowable limits.
Procedure:
1a. (Mark V Plus Injector Head only)
Observe the VOLUME REMAINING Display on the injector
head:
If the value displayed is zero, or in extreme reverse
position (beyond 63, 150 or 200 ml), the plunger
may be jammed; see step 2 below.
If the indicator is between the limits of travel, continue with step 3 below.
1b. (Mark V Injector Head only)
Observe the plunger position indicator on the head Control
Panel:
If the indicator is at the extreme forward position
(beyond zero) or extreme reverse position (beyond
150/200), it may be jammed; see step 2 below.
If the indicator is against the Mechanical Stop indicator, it may be jammed; see step 2 below.
If the indicator is between the limits of travel, continue with step 3 below.

19 - 21

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


2. Attempt to move the plunger manually with the motor knob
on the back of the head. If the plunger moves, or, the display changes, continue with step 3. If the condition persists, disassemble the head and attempt to manually move
the plunger drive gear. The drive may be jammed.
3. Check the injector head cable and connectors for broken
or intermittent connections.
4. Check the injector head for broken connections or an open
plunger position pot.
5. If the condition persists, replace the Servo Control Card.
6. If the condition persists, replace the injector head.
CHECK TURRET OR MECHANICAL STOP (Revised for MV 7.0)
Turret is not in the proper position for an injection. The turret must be
locked into position before the injector is armed. (MV 6.3 and above
only) Forward load has been activated while the plunger is at the full
forward limit (or the plunger plate is in contact with the mechanical
stop plate), or, the turret is out of position.
Reverse the plunger to full reverse position, rotate turret in both directions, then lock turret in proper position.
If the problem persists:
1. Check the injector head cable and connectors for broken
or intermittent connections.
2. Check the injector head for broken connections or a defective limit switch.
3. If the condition persists, replace the Servo Control Card.
CLEAR ALL PPI MEMORY - YES OR NO
Clears contents of PPI memory, in response to a RECALL 53. All preset injection programs can be erased. To erase all stored programs,
press YES. To keep existing programs and return to normal operation,
press NO.
CLEAR ALL VALUES - YES OR NO
Displayed after the CLEAR CUM PATIENT VOLUME - YES/NO message has been answered in the RESET procedure. To clear all currently displayed injection parameters, press YES. To return to normal
operation, keeping currently displayed injection parameters, press
NO.
CLEAR CUM PATIENT VOLUME - YES/NO
Displayed in response to the pressing of the RESET key. This procedure is used to reset the patient Volume accumulator, which records
an accumulating total of the amount injected into each patient. To
clear the existing total, (indicating a new patient), and begin accumu-

19 - 22

Troubleshooting Guide
lating the total Volume injected again, press YES. To protect this total,
press NO.
CMD BLOCK NOT PROCESSED
Communication block from the Remote Panel has not been properly
processed. Remove and reapply power to the injector. If the problem
persists, replace the CPU Card.
COMMUNICATIONS ABORTED
Remote Panel does not respond, or responds with four consecutive
negative acknowledgments. Remove and reapply power, then attempt
to operate the unit again.
If the condition persists:
1. Check the Remote Panel cable for broken or intermittent
connections, focusing particular attention to shield and
ground connections, then check continuity of the cable and
connections.
2. If the unit is also equipped with an integral keypad, disconnect the Remote Panel, then attempt to operate the injector without the Remote Panel.
3. If the condition persists, call Medrad Service.
COMMUNICATIONS ABORTED: NAKCOUNT
Displayed on the Remote Panel: The Remote Panel has received
three consecutive negative acknowledgments from the Main Unit for a
transmitted keystroke. Remove and reapply power, then attempt to
operate the unit again.
If the condition persists:
1. Check the Remote Panel cable for broken or intermittent
connections, focusing particular attention to shield and
ground connections, then check continuity of the cable and
connections.
2. If the unit is also equipped with an integral keypad, disconnect the Remote Panel, then attempt to operate the injector without the Remote Panel.
3. If the condition persists, call Medrad Service.
COMMUNICATIONS ABORTED: TIME-OUT
Displayed on the Remote Panel: After three attempts to communicate,
the Remote Panel has not received a response from the Main Unit for
a transmitted keystroke. Remove and reapply power, then attempt to
operate the unit again.
If the condition persists:
1. Check the Remote Panel cable for broken or intermittent
connections, focusing particular attention to shield and
ground connections, then check continuity of the cable and
connections.
19 - 23

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


2. If the unit is also equipped with an integral keypad, disconnect the Remote Panel, then attempt to operate the injector without the Remote Panel.
3. If the condition persists, call Medrad Service.
COMMUNICATIONS FAILURE
Displayed on the Main Unit: The Main Unit is unable to transmit information to the Remote Panel. Remove and reapply power, then
attempt to operate the unit again.
Service Procedure:
1. Check the Remote Panel cable for broken or intermittent
connections, focusing particular attention to shield and
ground connections, then check continuity of the cable and
connections.
2. Disconnect the Remote Panel, then attempt use of the
injector without the Remote Panel.
3. If the condition persists, call Medrad Service.
**CPU RAM CHECKSUM ERROR
There is a fault in the RAM, located on the CPU Card. Remove and
reapply power, then attempt to operate the unit again. If the condition
persists, replace the CPU Card.
CUMULATIVE PATIENT VOL XXX.X ML
The STATUS button was pressed; the message shows total Volume
injected since the accumulator was reset. This keeps track of the total
Volume injected into each patient.
DECIMAL NOT ALLOWED
Indicates that the variable must be entered as whole numbers (ex.
1,2,3), not in decimal form (1.2,1.3,1.4).
DUE TO R/F, MIN VOL = XXX.X ML
Selected Volume must be at least the quantity shown to deliver the
selected Flow Rate within the specified Rise/Fall time.
ENTER DELAY
The Delta 7 button was pressed. The injector is now ready for an XRAY or INJECT delay to be entered.
ENTER DURATION
The Delta 5 button was pressed. The injector is now ready for an
Injection Duration to be entered.
ENTER FLOW RATE
The Delta 2 button was pressed. The injector is now ready for a Flow
Rate value to be entered.
NOTE: Maximum Flow Rate of the 60 ml syringe system is 20.
19 - 24

Troubleshooting Guide
ENTER PPI NUMBER XX, THEN STORE
The STORE button was pressed; displays the number of the next
unused program storage location. Enter the number shown (or any
number less than 50), then press STORE.
ENTER PRESSURE
The Delta 6 button was pressed. The injector is now ready for a Pressure Limit to be entered.
ENTER PROGRAM NUMBER THEN RECALL
The RECALL button was pressed. Press the number buttons to enter
the program desired, then press the RECALL button again to enter.
ENTER PSI=1,KG=2,KPA=3,ATU=4
Program 51 was recalled to change the Pressure scale. Enter the corresponding number for the scale desired.
ENTER RISE/FALL TIME
Delta 1 was pressed. The injector is ready for the user to enter a rise
or fall time.
ENTER SYRINGE SIZE: 60=1, 150=2 (MV 6.3 and above)
Displayed in response to RECALL, 50, in order change the programmed syringe size; or, displayed after the head selection step in
the RECALL, 65 procedure. Enter the corresponding number of the
syringe to be used in injection procedures.
ENTER SYRINGE SIZE: 150=1, 200=2 (PR 3.3 and below)
Displayed in response to RECALL, 50, in order change the programmed syringe size. Appears if injector memory has been cleared.
Enter the corresponding number of the syringe to be used in injection
procedures.
ENTER SYRINGE SIZE: 150=2, 200=3 (MV 4.0 and above)
Displayed in response to RECALL, 50, in order change the programmed syringe size; or, displayed after the head selection step in
the RECALL, 65 procedure. Enter the corresponding number of the
syringe to be used in injection procedures.
ENTER THREE CHARACTER PASSWORD (MV 6.3 and above)
Program 65 has been recalled to change the programmed head configuration. Enter the service access password, then select the proper
head configuration.
ENTER TITLE OR STORE
STORE sequence prompt that is displayed after a PPI number has
been entered; allows the user to add a title to the stored injection.
Procedure: If a title is desired, enter numbers on the keypad or press
SHIFT to enter letters. If no title is desired, press STORE again.

19 - 25

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


ENTER VALUES OR ARMSIZE XXX/TVOL XXX
The unit is in a stand-by condition. The operator may enter new values, or keep the existing values shown or arm by pressing one of the
ARM buttons. The alternating message on the right displays the programmed syringe size and the total Volume selected.
ENTER VOLUME
The Delta 4 button was pressed. The injector is now ready for a Volume value to be entered.
ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATIONS
This message is displayed on the Remote Panel after power-up or
recovery from a system monitor condition. This message implies that
the Remote Panel is attempting to communicate with the Main Unit,
not that a system monitor condition exists. If an error occurs, another
message will be prompted to specify the nature of the communications failure.
**EXT START SHORTED
There is a short in the external start circuit, or the external start switch
is closed during the arming procedure.
Procedure:
1. Remove power and disconnect the external start at J-40 or
the X-Ray connector.
2. If the injector now functions properly using the start switch
on the cord reel, or connected to the front of the CRC,
check the external start circuit for shorts and improper closure.
3. If the condition remains with the external start switch disconnected, replace the I/O Card.
4. If the condition persists, replace: ESR / EPI Card (in pedestal systems) Isolation Circuit IIF (on CRC Motherboards)
EXTERNAL DISARM SIGNAL ACTIVE
External disarm input, available through the Imaging System Interface
ISI-100, (J40) is active. The injector cannot be armed until this input is
open.
**FLOW RATE D/A >0
Output of the Flow Rate DAC is not zero during standby. Replace the
Servo Control Card.

19 - 26

Troubleshooting Guide
FWD/REV SWITCH DEPRESSED
One of the head load buttons is pressed or shorted while the user is
attempting to arm. Press RESET, NO, NO then attempt to ARM again.
Procedure:
1. Check for shorts in the injector head cable, wiring, and
Control Panel.
2. If the condition persists, replace the injector head.
3. If the condition persists, replace the Servo Control Card.
**FWD MOTOR MOVEMENT
The injector was armed, followed by the forward motor movement of 2
ml or more without a forward load command. This message can be
triggered by either an electrical malfunction or improper operating
technique.
To verify electrical malfunction:
1. Arm the injector, then check the motor knob for plunger
movement. If movement occurs, the line frequency may be
miscalibrated.
2. Recalibrate or replace the Power Drive Card.
3. If unable to confirm electrical malfunction, this message
also appears if the manual knob on the rear of the head is
turned after the injector is armed, or during the arming
sequence.
**HAND SWITCH SHORTED
There is a short in the hand start circuit, or the start switch is closed
during the ARMing sequence.
Procedure:
1. Ensure that the start button is not pressed.
2. Disconnect any auxiliary start connections (footswitch,
auxiliary handswitch, etc.), then retry.
3. Disconnect the start cord reel, then retry.
4. If the injector now functions properly using an external start
switch, check the start switch and cord reel for shorts and
improper closure.
5. If the condition remains with the cord reel disconnected,
replace the I/O Card.
ILLEGAL RECALL FUNCTION
The operator attempted to recall a program number above 50 that is
not available. Press RECALL, then select the correct program.

19 - 27

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


ILLEGAL TURRET SIZE SELECTED (MV 6.3 and above)
The turret selected is not available with the existing injector head configuration. Press RESET, then attempt to select another syringe size.
INCORRECT PASSWORD, TRY AGAIN (MV 6.3 and above)
An incorrect password was entered in response to the RECALL, 65
procedure of injector head selection. Enter the service access password, then select the proper head configuration.
INJECT DELAY (MV 6.3 and above)
Displayed when the unit is in an injection delay mode prior to actual
fluid delivery.
INJECTING
Injection is in progress.
INJECTION COMPLETE
Injection is finished, the start switch is still closed.
INJECTION NUMBER = XX
A untitled pre-programmed injection has been recalled from memory.
INJECTION PREVIEW
The INJ PREV button on the ECG option was pressed, triggering the
unit to display a simulation, or profile of an injection program.
INJECTOR HEAD MALFUNCTION (MV 4.0 and above)
Actual Flow Rate has exceeded the selected Flow Rate, or, actual
Volume delivered has exceeded the selected Volume.
Procedure:
1. Replace the Power Drive Card.
2. If the condition persists, replace the Servo Control Card.
3. If the condition persists, replace the injector head - suspect
an intermittently open plunger feedback pot.
INVALID INJECTION PROGRAM (MV 6.3 and above)
An attempt was made to store an injection program that has some
invalid parameter(s).
Procedure:
1. Review existing parameters, then correct any errors discovered.
2. Store the injection program.

19 - 28

Troubleshooting Guide
INVALID PPI NUMBER
Number entered cannot be used. The value is either too large, or a
decimal.
LINK ERROR: CANT SEND
Displayed on the Remote Panel if it is unable to transmit to the Main
Unit. Remove and reapply power.
Service Procedure:
1. Check the Remote Panel cable for broken or intermittent
connections.
2. Disconnect the Remote Panel, then use the injector without the Remote Panel.
3. If the injector now operates properly, replace the Remote
Panel unit.
4. If the condition persists, replace the PPI card in the Main
Unit.
5. If the condition persists, call Medrad or the local dealer for
assistance.

NOTE: Software versions 3.3 and below:


A D0XX message code number precedes the following messages
in software versions 3.3 and below. The words MAIN UNIT do
not precede the System Monitor message.

MAIN UNIT - CPU: ROM CRC


The CPU Card ROM did not pass the Cyclic Redundancy Check.
Remove and reapply power, then attempt to operate the unit again.
Procedure:
1. If the ROMs have been replaced as part of a software
update procedure, they may have been installed in the
wrong slots.
2. If the condition persists, replace the CPU Card with one
containing a new set of ROMs.
MAIN UNIT - CPU: SYS RAM
The CPU Card RAM failed a read/write exercise. Remove and reapply
power, then attempt to operate the unit again. If the condition persists,
replace the CPU Card.

19 - 29

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


MAIN UNIT - INTERRUPT FAILURE (Mark V - MV 4.0 and below)
MAIN UNIT INTERRUPT TEST FAILED (MV 6.3 and above)
There is an error on one of the interrupt lines to the CPU. Remove and
reapply power, then attempt to operate the unit again.
Service Procedure:
1. Replace the I/O Card.
2. If the condition persists, replace the CPU Card.
3. If the condition persists, replace the Servo Control Card.
4. If the condition remains, look for an open or grounded
interrupt line on the motherboard.
MAIN UNIT - PPI: BACKUP MEMORY
The backup memory on the PPI card failed a read/write exercise.
Remove and reapply power, then attempt to operate the unit again.
Service Procedure:
1. Clear the PPI memory by:
Removing, shorting, then replacing the PPI RAM
chips. (MV 4.0 and below)
Removing power from the injector, then press and
hold the Delta 1 and Delta 2 buttons. With these
buttons depressed, reapply power to the injector.
(MV 6.3 and above)
2. If the condition persists, replace the PPI Card.
MAIN UNIT - PPI: PRIMARY MEMORY
The primary memory on the PPI Card failed a read/write exercise.
Remove and reapply power, then attempt to operate the unit again.
Service Procedure:
1. Clear the PPI memory by:
Removing, shorting, then replacing the PPI RAM
chips. (MV 4.0 and below)
Removing power from the injector, then press and
hold the Delta 1 and Delta 2 buttons. With these
buttons depressed, reapply power to the injector.
(MV 6.3 and above)
2. If the condition persists, replace the PPI card.
MAIN UNIT-SCC: PIO3 INOPERATIVE
Input/Output port 3 (PIO3) on the Servo Control Card is not functioning properly. Replace the Servo Control Card.
MAIN UNIT-I/O: PIO2 INOPERATIVE
Input/Output port 2 (PIO2) on the I/O Card is not functioning properly.
Replace the I/O Card.
19 - 30

Troubleshooting Guide
MAIN UNIT-I/O: PIO1 INOPERATIVE
Input/Output port 1 (PIO1) on the I/O Card is not functioning properly.
Replace the I/O Card.
MAIN UNIT-SCC: +10V REF (Mark V - MV 4.0 and below)
MAIN UNIT SCC: +10V REF FAILURE (MV 6.3 and above)
The +10 V reference supplied by the Servo Control Card, and used by
the feed-back pots in the head, is out of specification. Remove and
reapply power, then attempt to operate the unit again.
Procedure:
1. Remove power, disconnect the injector head cable, then
retry. The message CHECK INJ HEAD CABLE PL should
appear. If so, the error condition lies in the injector head,
continue with step 4.
2. If the condition persists, check the +15 VDC supply on the
servo control board, which powers the +10 V reference
chip.
3. If the condition persists, replace the Servo Control Card.
4. If the condition persists, check for shorts in the injector
head cable, internal wiring, connectors, and feedback pots.

0LQLPXP DQG 0D[LPXP 3UHVVXUH 9DOXHV


 PO 6\ULQJH

PO  6(&

PO  0,1  +5

 DQG  PO 6\ULQJH

SVL

NJ

N3D

DW

SVL

NJ

N3D

DW

















































PO  6(&

PO  0,1  +5

9DOXHV VKRZQ DUH IRU WKH  PO V\ULQJH


PO6(& YDOXHV IRU  PO V\ULQJH DUH









MAIN UNIT-SCC: PSI LIMIT DAC (Mark V - MV 4.0 and below)


MAIN UNIT SCC: PSI DAC FAILURE (MV 6.3 and above)
Pressure limit DAC output on the Servo Control Card is not within
allowable limits. Remove and reapply power, then attempt to operate
the unit again. If the condition persists, replace the Servo Control
Card.
MAIN UNIT - SCC: FLOW SEL DAC (Mark V - MV 4.0 and below)
MAIN UNIT SCC: FLOW DAC FAILURE (MV 6.3 and above)
Flow Rate DAC output on the Servo Control Card is not within allowable limits. Remove and reapply power, then attempt to operate the
unit again. If the condition persists, replace the Servo Control Card.
19 - 31

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


MAIN UNIT - SCC: M.S. CMD DAC (Mark V - MV 4.0 and below)
MAIN UNIT SCC: MS DAC FAILURE (MV 6.3 and above)
Mechanical Stop command DAC output on the Servo Control Card is
not within allowable limits. Remove and reapply power, then attempt
to operate the unit again. If the condition persists, replace the Servo
Control Card.
MAX DELAY IS 99.9 SECONDS
A delay above 99.9 was entered. Press RESET, then enter a value no
greater than 99.9 seconds.
MAX FLOW IS 59 ML/MIN OR ML/HR
Injector is in the ML/MIN or ML/HR Flow scale, and a Flow Rate
above 59 ml/min or ml/hr was entered. Press RESET, then enter a
value no greater than 59 ml/min or ml/hr.
MAXIMUM DURATION IS 650 SECONDS
A Duration above 650 seconds was entered. Press RESET, then
enter a Duration value no greater than 650 seconds.
MAXIMUM FLOW RATE IS 20 (MV 6.3 and above)
A Flow Rate above 20 was entered while in the 60 ml syringe system.
Press RESET, then enter a Flow Rate less than 20.
MAXIMUM FLOW RATE IS 50 ML/SEC
Injector is in the ML/SEC Flow scale, and a Flow Rate above 50 ml/
sec was entered. Press RESET, then enter a value no greater than 50
ml/sec.
MAXIMUM RISE/FALL IS 9.9 SECONDS
A Rise/Fall time greater than 9.9 seconds was entered. Press RESET,
then enter a value no greater than 9.9 seconds.
MAX PRESSURE IN ML/MIN/HR IS XXXX (MV 6.3 and above)
A pressure limit was entered that is greater than the maximum
allowed in any given flow scale or syringe size. Enter a pressure limit
value no greater than the respective maximum.
MAX PRESSURE IN ML/MIN/HR IS 10 (Mark V - MV 4.0 and below)
A pressure limit above 10 at (atmospheres) was entered while using
a Flow scale of ml/min or ml/hr. Press RESET, then enter a value no
greater than 10 at.
MAX PRESSURE IN ML/MIN/HR IS 11 (Mark V - MV 4.0 and below)
A pressure limit above 11 kg/sq cm was entered while using a Flow
scale of ml/min or ml/hr. Press RESET, then enter a value no greater
than 11 kg/sq cm.
MAX PRESSURE IN ML/MIN/HR IS 150 0DUN 9  09  DQG EHORZ
A pressure limit above 150 psi was entered while using a Flow scale
of ml/min or ml/hr. Press RESET, then enter a value no greater than
150 psi.
19 - 32

Troubleshooting Guide
MAX PRESSURE IN ML/MIN/HR IS 1034 (0DUN 9  09  DQG EHORZ
A pressure limit above 1034 kPa (kilopascals) was entered while
using a Flow scale of ml/min or ml/hr. Press RESET, then enter a
value no greater than 1034 kPa.
MAX PRESSURE IN ML/SEC IS XXXX (MV 6.3 and above)
A pressure limit which exceeds the maximum allowed in the selected
syringe system and flow scale. Enter a pressure limit no greater than
the respective maximum. (See acceptable pressure value ranges).
MAX PRESSURE IN ML/SEC IS 68 (Mark V - MV 4.0 and below)
A pressure limit above 68 at (atmospheres) was entered while using
the ml/sec Flow scale. This message appears when using 200 ml
syringes and the at Pressure scale. Press RESET, then enter a
value no greater than 68 at.
MAX PRESSURE IN ML/SEC IS 70 (Mark V - MV 4.0 and below)
A pressure limit above 70 kg/sq cm was entered while using the ml/
sec Flow scale. This message appears when using 200 ml syringes
and the kg (kg/sq cm) Pressure scale. Press RESET, then enter a
value no greater than 70 kg/sq cm.
MAX PRESSURE IN ML/SEC IS 82
A pressure limit above 82 at (atmospheres) was entered while using
the ml/sec Flow scale. This message appears when using 150 ml
syringes and the at Pressure scale. Press RESET, then enter a value
no greater than 82 at.
MAX PRESSURE IN ML/SEC IS 84
A pressure limit above 84 kg/sq cm was entered while using the ml/
sec Flow scale. This message appears when using 150 ml syringes
and the kg (kg/sq cm) Pressure scale. Press RESET, then enter a
value no greater than 84 kg/sq cm.
MAX PRESSURE IN ML/SEC IS 6895
A pressure limit above 6895 kPa (kilopascals) was entered while
using the ml/sec Flow scale. This message appears when using 200
ml syringes and the kPa Pressure scale. Press RESET, then enter a
value no greater than 6895 kPa.
MAX PRESSURE IN ML/SEC IS 8274
A pressure limit above 8274 kPa (kilopascals) was entered while
using the ml/sec Flow scale. This message appears when using 150
ml syringes and the kPa Pressure scale. Press RESET, then enter a
value no greater than 8274 kPa.
MAX PRESSURE WITH 150 ML IS 1200 0DUN 9  09  DQG EHORZ
A pressure limit above 1200 psi was entered when using 150 ml
syringes in the psi Pressure scale. Press RESET, then enter a value
no greater than 1200 PSI.

19 - 33

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


MAX PRESSURE WITH 200 ML IS 1000 0DUN 9  09  DQG EHORZ
A pressure limit above 1000 psi was entered when using 200 ml
syringes and the psi Pressure scale. Press RESET, then enter a value
no greater than 1000 psi.
MECHANICAL STOP FAILURE (MV 6.3 and above)
MECHANICAL STOP POSITION FAILURE (MV 4.0 and below)
The Mechanical Stop has not positioned itself correctly, or, has taken
too long to move into position. Remove and reapply power, then
attempt to operate the unit again.
Service Procedure:
1. Remove power from the injector, then remove the injector
head covers. Manually move the Mechanical Stop drive
belt to ensure freedom of movement; then look for
mechanical interference, broken connections, or other
damage to the Mechanical Stop motor, drive system, and
potentiometers.
2. If the condition persists, replace the Mechanical Stop Drive
Card.
3. If the condition persists, replace the Servo Control Card.
4. If the condition persists, replace the injector head.
MIN PRESSURE SELECTABLE IS XXXX (MV 6.3 and above)
A pressure limit of less than the minimum selectable for a given pressure scale has been entered. Enter a pressure limit value no less than
the minimum allowable. (See matrix of acceptable pressure limit value
ranges).
MIN VOL ALLOWED FOR 60 ML IS .5 (MV 6.3 and above)
A Volume of less than .5 ml was selected while in the 60 ml syringe
system. Enter a Volume value of no less than .5 ml.
MIN VOL ALLOWED IS 1 ML (MV 6.3 and above)
A Volume of less than 1 ml was selected while in the 150 ml syringe
system. Enter a Volume value of no less than 1 ml.
MINIMUM DURATION ENTRY XXX.X SEC
Injection Duration must be at least the value shown in order to deliver
the selected Volume at the selected Flow Rate. Set the Injection Duration at any value greater than or equal to that shown, and less than
650.
MINIMUM FLOW RATE IS .3 (MV 6.3 and above)
A Flow Rate value less than .3 was selected. Enter a Flow Rate value
of at least .3 ml/sec/min/hr.

19 - 34

Troubleshooting Guide
MISSING DATA CODE ON RCV
The RS-232C interface (from the Remote Panel) is sending an error
message.
Procedure:
1. Remove power from the injector for ten seconds, then
reapply power and retry. There may have been transient
interference on the lines.
2. Disconnect the Remote Panel, then use the injector without the Remote Panel.
3. If the injector now operates properly, replace the Remote
Panel unit.
4. If the condition persists, replace the PPI card in the Main
Unit.
MONITOR MODE
When the Remote Panel is connected, this message is displayed on
the slave unit (serving as a monitor). This Slave could be the Remote
Panel or the Control Panel on the Main Unit.
MOVE PLUNGER 2 ML, THEN REARM 0DUN 9  09  DQG EHORZ
MOVE PLUNGER FWD 2 ML, THEN REARM (MV 6.3 and above)
When power is first applied, this message is displayed if the operator
fails to advance the injector head plunger at least 2 ml prior to arming.
To correct:
1. Advance the plunger forward (or reverse) at least 2 ml.
Verification is indicated by 5 short beeps.
2. Rearm the injector.
NOTE: If the plunger is in full reverse, pressing reverse load
will prompt the Sentinel message PLUNGER POT
MECHANICAL FAILURE. To correct, remove injector
power, wait 10 seconds, reapply power, then advance
the plunger forward.
NOTE: If power is removed and reapplied at any time, the
plunger must be advanced forward 2 ml before arming.

19 - 35

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


**NMI - WATCHDOG 1 FAILED
Watchdog 1 on the CPU Card is not being triggered, sending an interrupt signal to the CPU.
Procedure:
1. Remove power from the injector for 10 seconds, reapply
power and retry.
2. If the condition persists, replace the CPU Card.
NOT ENOUGH VOLUME FOR INJECTION
This message appears during MULTIple injections. Insufficient Volume remains in the syringe for additional injections. Select a lower
Volume value, or load additional media into the syringe.
ONE DECIMAL DIGIT ONLY
Entered more than one number after pressing the decimal point.
Press RESET, then enter a value with only one decimal digit.
ONE DECIMAL POINT ONLY
Pressed the decimal point button more than once while entering a
value. Press RESET, then enter a value with only one decimal point.
ONLY ML/SEC ALLOWED IN ECG MODE
With ECG injections, only ML/SEC can be used. Select a Flow Rate in
the ml/sec scale.
PLUNGER POT MECHANICAL FAILURE
The feedback voltage received from the plunger position potentiometer was not within allowable tolerances during the system mechanical
Self Test. This message may also be prompted if the reverse load button was pressed in order to verify the head pot, with the plunger in the
full reverse position. When power is applied to the injector, the plunger
must be advanced forward 2 ml for verification of proper pot operation.
Procedure:
1. Verify proper injector head cable connections.
2. Inspect the physical condition of the plunger pot and associated pot gears.
3. If the condition persists, replace the plunger pot.
4. If the condition persists, replace the injector head.

19 - 36

Troubleshooting Guide
**POWER DRIVE FAILURE
A fault occurred in the injector motor drive circuits during standby.
Remove power from the injector for 10 seconds, reapply power, and
retry.
Service Procedure:
1. If the condition persists, replace the Servo Control Card.
2. If the condition persists, replace the Power Drive Card.
** PPI MEMORY COMPARE ERROR
A fault in the PPI memory; the primary memory data does not match
backup data. Remove power from the injector for 10 seconds, then
turn it on and try again.
Service Procedure:
1. Clear the PPI memory by:
Removing, shorting, then replacing the PPI RAM
chips. (MV 4.0 and below)
Removing power from the injector, then press and
hold the Delta 1 and Delta 2 buttons. With these
buttons depressed, reapply power to the injector.
(MV 6.3 and above)
2. If the condition occurs repeatedly, replace the PPI card.
PPI MEMORY FILLED
No additional programs can be stored unless an existing program is
cleared first. Delete stored programs which are not, or seldom, used.
PPI NUMBER XX NOT USED
Displayed in response to attempting to recall a Pre-Programmed
Injection that does not exist at the selected location. Scroll through the
programs to search for program desired, or create a new program.
PPI PANEL CHECKSUM ERROR
A fault exists in the PPI memory; the checkless does not match the
parameters displayed on the Control Panel. Press RESET to clear the
fault. If the message appears again, remove and reapply power.
Service Procedure:
1. Clear the PPI memory by:
Removing, shorting, then replacing the PPI RAM
chips. (MV 4.0 and below)
Removing power from the injector, then press and
hold the Delta 1 and Delta 2 buttons. With these
buttons depressed, reapply power to the injector.
(MV 6.3 and above)
2. If the condition occurs repeatedly, replace the PPI Card.
3. If the condition persists, replace the CPU Card.

19 - 37

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


PPI RECALL CHECKSUM ERROR
The injection program saved in PPI memory does not match the program loaded in the system RAM. Clear the program from PPI memory
using RECALL 52, then attempt to reenter the program.
PREMATURE TERMINATION
An injection was interrupted before the selected Volume had been
injected. The handswitch or remote start switch was released before
the injection completion. Repeat the injection if possible.
Service Procedure:
1. If the condition persists, suspect an intermittent connection
in the start circuit, or electrical interference on the start or
power lines.
2. If an external start is being used, ensure that it remains
closed throughout the injection.
**P.S.I. LIMIT EXCEEDED
Actual Pressure has exceeded the selected Pressure by at least 100
PSI.
Service Procedure:
1. Replace the Servo Control Card.
2. If the condition persists, replace the Power Drive Card.
**PWR DRIVE FAILURE
A Fault occurred in the injector motor drive circuits during an injection.
Remove power from the injector for 10 seconds, reapply power, and
retry.
Service Procedure:
1. If the condition persists, replace the Servo Control Card.
2. If the condition persists, replace the Power Drive Card.
3. If the condition persists, check the injector head cable for
broken or intermittent connections. Carefully inspect the
plunger motor leads.
4. If the condition persists, replace the injector head.
READY TO INJECT XXX.X VOLUME (MV 6.3 and above)
Appears when the injector is armed and ready to inject the volume
selected. Activate the start switch to begin fluid delivery.
READY TO INJECT (Mark V - MV 4.0 and below)
Appears when the injector is armed and ready to inject. Activate the
start switch to begin fluid delivery.

19 - 38

Troubleshooting Guide
REMOTE PANEL NOT CONNECTED
An attempt was made to recall program 70 on the Main Control Panel
without a Remote Panel connected. Recall 70 is only functional if
accessed from a Remote Panel
ROTATE TURRET TO 60 ML POSITION (MV 6.3 and above) or
ROTATE TURRET TO 150 ML POSITION (MV 6.3 and above)
Appears when an attempt is made to arm the unit with the turret in the
wrong position. Rotate the turret to the position required for the injection.
REVERSE PLUNGER MOTION DETECTED (New for MV 7.0)
The plunger has moved in the reverse direction during an injection.
**REV MOTOR MOVEMENT
While the injector was armed, the motor moved reverse 2 ml or more
without a reverse command. This message can be triggered by an
electrical malfunction or improper operating technique.
To verify electrical malfunction:
1. Arm the injector and check the motor knob for plunger
movement. If moving, the PDC may be miscalibrated.
2. If there is no plunger movement, replace the Servo Control
Card.
3. If unable to confirm electrical malfunction, this message
also appears if the motor knob on the rear of the head is
turned after the injector is armed, or during the arming
sequence.
SEE ANY AIR IN YOUR XXX SYRINGE? (Mark V - MV 4.0)
This message is displayed as the first part of the arming sequence.
XXX represents the programmed syringe size.
Procedure:
1. Verify that there is no air in the syringe, then press NO.
The injector proceeds to the next arming step.
2. To abort the arming sequence, press YES in response to
this message.
SELECT HEAD: 60/150=1, 150/200=2 (MV 6.3 and above)
Displayed in response to RECALL, 65, after the service access password is properly entered. May also be displayed if unit memory is lost.
Enter the corresponding number of the injector head to be used with
the system.
SELECT UTILITY FUNCTION (MV 6.3 and above)
Displayed if unit is powered up with SP1 on the CPU set for the utility
mode. Select the Utility Recall function desired.

19 - 39

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


SELF TEST INDICATES 60 ML TURRET
MV 6.3 and above, Mark V Plus head only)
Displayed only when the turret is in the 60 ml syringe position.
RECALL, 65 has been accessed in order to change head configuration to the 150/200 injector head. The system has detected that a 60/
150 head is installed, therefore, the 150/200 configuration cannot be
used.
SELF TEST IN PROGRESS VER MV 7.0 (New for MV 7.0)
The unit is running a self-test which occurs at power-up. Wait approximately 3-10 seconds for completion of the self-test, then continue with
normal operations.
SET LEVEL TO 1 TO CHANGE SCALE
An attempt was made to change the Flow scale at an intermediate
level in a multiple-level injection. Go to level 1, then change the Flow
Scale
SET VOLUME IS TOO HIGH XXX.X REMAINS
Insufficient Volume remains in the syringe for an injection of the
selected Volume. Enter a lower Volume setting or change syringes,
replacing with a full syringe.
**STALL TIME EXCEEDED
The main drive motor (and plunger) has been stalled, indicating either
a significant resistance in the fluid path, or physical interference in the
plunger or internal workings of the head. Check the syringe, plunger,
and fluid path for obstructions.
Service Procedure:
1. If the condition persists, replace the Servo Control Card.
2. If the condition persists, replace the Power Drive Card.

19 - 40

Troubleshooting Guide
START SIGNAL SHORTED
A short has occurred in the start circuit. The handswitch or external
start switch may be closed during standby.
Procedure:
1. Remove power from the injector, disconnect the external
start switch, reapply power, and retry
2. If the injector now functions properly using the start switch
on the cord reel or front of the CRC, check the external
start circuit for shorts and improper closure.
3. If the condition continues with the external start switch disconnected from the injector, disconnect the injector power
source, then disconnect the start cord reel, and retry.
4. If the injector now functions properly using an external start
switch, check the start switch and cord reel for shorts and
improper closure.
5. If the condition continues with the cord reel disconnected,
replace the I/O Card.
SYRINGE SYSTEM NOT INSTALLED (MV 6.3 only)
SYRINGE SYSTEM NOT SELECTED (New for MV 7.0)
This message is displayed when the system loses the programmed
injector head selection. The system will have to be reconfigured
before the injector can be used. Call Medrad Service for instructions.
TERMINATED R-WAVE SIGNAL LOSS
Used only with ECG injections. The injection was terminated due to
the lack of detection of an R-wave signal.
Procedure:
1. Check the ECG gain setting on the Control Panel.
2. If high level signal is being used (from monitor), check
cable and magnitude of output signal.
3. If low level signal is being used (directly from patient),
check the ECG electrodes, leads, cable, preamp, and
preamp output cable.
TO CLEAR, ENTER NR, THEN STORE
Displayed when selecting RECALL 52, an injection program can be
cleared from PPI memory. Enter the number of the program to be
erased, then press STORE.
TOTAL VOLUME EXCEEDED
The total volume of a multi-level injection exceeds the maximum possible volume of the selected syringe size. Change the settings to a
lower total Volume, or, select a larger syringe size.

19 - 41

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


TOTAL VOLUME OF XXX.X DESIRED?
For Multi-Level injections only. Asks for verification that the operator is
aware of the total Volume selected for all levels of the injection.
XXX.X indicates the total injection Volume. Verify that the Volume
displayed is the Volume desired, then press YES.
UNIT DISARMED XX (New for MV 7.0)
While the unit was armed, a disarm condition occurred. This message
is displayed for three seconds. The following is the disarm code reference list which identifies the source of the disarm condition. (For
example; if a panel key on the main keyboard is pressed while the unit
is armed or injecting, the following message would be displayed:
UNIT DISARMED 01
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Main keyboard
ECG keyboard
Remote panel keyboard
FWD/REV load switch
Turret
Watch Dog failure while arming
0300 only - Injector or Aux start detected while arming or injecting
0300 only - X-Ray or ISI released while injecting
0300 only - X-Ray or ISI detected during 0300 handswitch start
0300 only - Handswitch released (armed or injecting)
Remote handswitch released
Communication link failure
PIO3 Interrupt - type undetermined
External Disarm
PIO2 or PIO3 Interrupt - type undetermined
Start switch debounce error

VACANT INJECTION NUMBER


No program exists at the selected PPI storage number.
VERIFY DURATION
An attempt was made to arm the injector without a Duration value
entered or calculated. Enter a Duration value, or, reenter the Flow
Rate and Volume parameters.
VERIFY FLOW RATE
An attempt was made to arm the injector without a Flow Rate value
entered or calculated. Enter a Flow Rate value, or, reenter the Volume
and Injection Duration parameters.
VERIFY PRESSURE
An attempt was made to arm the injector without a Pressure value
entered. Press Delta 6, then enter a Pressure limit value.

19 - 42

Troubleshooting Guide
VERIFY VOLUME
An attempt was made to arm the injector without a Volume value
entered or calculated. Enter a Volume value, or reenter the Flow Rate
and Injection Duration.
VOLUME GREATER THAN SYRINGE SIZE
A Volume was entered that exceeds the size of the installed syringe.
Lower the Volume amount, or change to a larger syringe size.
XX IS USED, CLEAR IT_YES/NO?
A program is already stored in the PPI storage location selected.
Press YES to erase the stored program and replace with a new program in the same location. Press NO to save the existing program.
Re-enter a different storage location number for the new program.
XXX.X VOLUME REMAINS. ARM? YES/NO (New for MV 7.0)
The SINGLE arm key has been pressed in an attempt to arm the
injector when insufficient volume remains in the syringe to deliver the
program volume. The option is given to the user to either inject the
remaining insufficient volume, or to temporarily abandon arming until
program volume can be reprogrammed or syringe size can be
changed.
Press the YES key to complete the arming sequence
Press the NO key to abandon the arming sequence.
XXX.X VOLUME IS INSUFFICIENT TO ARM (New for MV 7.0)
The MULTIple arm key has been pressed in an attempt to arm the
injector when insufficient volume remains in the syringe to deliver one
bolus of the program volume. This message will be displayed for
approximately 3 seconds and indicates to the user that the current
remaining volume is insufficient to perform multiple injections according to the program volume selected.
60/150 SYRINGE SYSTEM INSTALLED (MV 6.3 and above)
The user attempted a size change to a 200 ml syringe from the Recall
50 utility program when the system software/hardware is configured
for the 60/150 syringe system. Use Recall 65 to access the 150/200
ml syringe system and select the 200 ml syringe size.
NOTE: The Mark V Plus 60/150 injector should not be configured for 200 ml syringe operation.

19 - 43

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


150/200 SYRINGE SYSTEM INSTALLED
The user attempted a size change to a 60 ml syringe from the Recall
50 utility program when the system software/hardware is configured
for the 150/200 syringe system. Use Recall 65 to access the 60/150
syringe system and select the 60 ml syringe size.
NOTE: The Mark V or Mark V Plus 150/200 injector should not
be configured for 60 ml syringe operation.
SERVICE UTILITY MESSAGES
The following messages are displayed when service utility programs
are accessed. Under normal circumstances, an operator of the injector will never see these messages displayed.
CHECK HANDSHAKE LINES
CHECK XMT/RCV LINES
CHECK HANDSHAKE LINES
MOVE PLUNGER TO FULL REVERSE
TESTING INTERFACE - XMIT/RCV=

19 - 44

Troubleshooting Guide

Non-Message Faults
This section aides in determining the source of a condition when no message (or a garbled message) appears on the Sentinel.
The following non-message faults are covered. Refer to the following
pages for possible causes, and the procedure for correcting the condition.

Condition
Dead Unit
No Drive
Will Not Inject
Garbled Message
No ECG or Scope Display
No Scope Display (ECG ok)
Weak or Erratic R-Waves
High-Level ECG Input
Low-Level ECG Input

Page #
19 - 46
19 - 47
19 - 48
19 - 48
19 - 49
19 - 49
19 - 50
19 - 50
19 - 51

19 - 45

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


DEAD UNIT

No Control Panel LEDs or backlights are illuminated, the power switch


may or may not illuminate.

If the power switch is lit, AC line power is getting to the injector.


Check the following:
1. Power Supply Card +5 VDC supply and fuse.
2. Other Power Supply Card supply lines and fuses.
3. If any voltages are non-existent, remove injector power, disconnect the injector head, then remove all cards, except the
Power Supply Card, from the unit. Reapply power and
check for the existence of Power Supply voltages.

If Power Supply voltage now exists, one or more of the


cards in the unit are not functioning properly. Reinsert each
card, checking for the existence of voltage, to determine
which card is not functioning properly.

If voltage is still nonexistent, replace the Power Supply


Card, then insert and check the voltage of the remaining
cards, one at a time.

If the power switch is not lit, the AC line power is not getting into the
injector.
Check the following:
1. Line power at the outlet.
2. Power cord and plug for open connections.
3. Power switch.
4. Main line fuses or circuit breakers. In Pedestal Systems,
the line fuses are located on the power transformer plate
inside the bottom of the pedestal;* in Control Room Consoles, the line fuses or circuit breakers are on the card rack
on the lower left side - facing the front of the open unit.
5. Line filter and AC line wiring.
6. Power transformer.
*

19 - 46

Some units contain circuit breakers which are


located on the back of the unit.

Troubleshooting Guide
NO DRIVE

The plunger motor does not turn, for loading or injection.

Symptom:
Injects, but does not load:
1. Listen for a click when pressing the forward or reverse load
switch on the head.
2. If there is no click, replace the injector head.
3. If there is a click, replace the power drive chassis or DRC
Card.
4. If the condition persists, replace the Power Drive Card

Loads, but does not inject:

1.
2.
3.
4.

If the unit does not inject within three seconds after being
commanded to do so, this message should appear on the
Sentinel: **STALL TIME EXCEEDED
Check for physical interference of the plunger or other
mechanical parts of the head.
If the condition continues, replace the Servo Control Card.
If the condition continues, replace the Power Drive Chassis
or DRC Card.
If the condition persists, replace the Power Drive Card.

Does not load or inject:


1. Check AC power (150 VAC) into the SCR bridge. In Pedestal Systems, the bridge is located on the power chassis. In
Control Room Consoles, the bridge is located on the Power
Drive Relay Card.
2. If the voltage measures correctly:
a) Replace the Power Drive Card.
b) If the condition continues, replace the Power Drive
Chassis or DRC Card - suspect the SCR bridge.
c) If the condition persists, replace the head - suspect
an open plunger motor.

19 - 47

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


WILL NOT INJECT

The injector appears normal during standby and setup, during Forward
and Reverse load, but will not inject.
The SENTINEL will continue to display, READY TO INJECT.

Drive circuits are working properly if loading functions normally.


The condition is caused by an open start line or defective start circuit.
Troubleshoot:
1. Press the SINGLE or MULTiple arm, but not the YES key.
Press the hand switch. If there is proper handswitch continuity, the SENTINEL will display: **HAND SWITCH
SHORTED. If this message does not appear, check the
start switch or cord reel.
2. Plug an external start switch into the rear connector panel.
Inject with the external start switch.
3. If there is no injection with the external start switch, replace
the I/O Card.
4. If the condition continues, replace the Servo Control Card.
5. If the condition persists, replace the Power Drive Card.

GARBLED
MESSAGE

The message displayed on the Sentinel is garbled or partial. Suspect


the interface between the I/O and Display Card, or suspect the cards
themselves.
Troubleshoot:
Integral Display Panel:
1. Ensure proper connection of the ribbon cable between the
I/O and Display Card by removing and reconnecting.
2. If the condition continues, replace the I/O Card.
3. If the condition continues, replace the CPU Card.
4. If the condition persists, replace the Display Card.

Remote Panel:
1. Ensure proper connection of the ribbon cable which connects the Remote Panel Control Card and the Display Card
by removing and reconnecting.
2. If the condition persists, replace the Remote Panel Control
Unit.

19 - 48

Troubleshooting Guide
NO
ECG/SCOPE
DISPLAY

None of the ECG/Scope displays are functioning properly. Suspect the


interface between the I/O and ECG/scope display cards, or the cards
themselves.
Troubleshoot:
1a. (Pedestal unit) Ensure proper connection of the ribbon
cable between the I/O and Display Card by removing and
reconnecting.
1b. (CRC unit) Ensure that all cables are fully seated between
the CRC and CRM units.
2. If the condition continues, replace the I/O Card.
3. If the condition continues, replace the CPU Card.
4. If the condition persists, replace the ECG/Scope Display
Card.

NO SCOPE DISPLAY

Scope does not function, but the ECG section is not affected.
Does the LED next to the SCOPE ON/OFF button illuminate? If not,
suspect the cabling interface between the ECG/Scope Display and I/O
cards, or the cards themselves. Troubleshoot this symptom as
described on the previous page.
If the LED lights:
1. Set the scope controls as follows. The indicator next to
these words should be lit.
SWEEP MODE
CONTinuous
SWEEP SPEED
10 MM/SEC
INPUT SELECT for top channel
AUX1
INPUT SELECT for bottom channel AUX2
2. Two traces should appear on the screen. If Scope traces do
not appear suspect the following:
a) The intensity may be turned down. Locate the intensity control on the back of the console, then turn in
both directions.
b) One or both of the traces may be off screen. Press
the POSITION Up and Down buttons for the missing
channel.
c) If the traces are still not visible, call Medrad Service.
3. Return the input selectors to previous settings: ECG on
channel 1, INJ on channel 2.

19 - 49

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


WEAK OR ERRATIC
R-WAVES

The user cannot get reliable triggering of the ECG section. The RWAVE light flashes erratically, and the R-R (SECS) and HEART RATE
(BPM) displays are not stable. The waveform on the scope may also
be weak and noisy.
Troubleshoot:
1. Check the ECG gain setting on the Control Panel.
2. If high level signal is being used, check the cable and
amplitude of the output signal.
3. If low level signal is being used, check the ECG electrodes,
leads, cable, preamp, and pre-amp output cable.
4. If the ECG signal displayed on the scope is noisy and
erratic, check the setting of S1 on the ISI card. This sets the
cutoff frequency for the notch filter at either 50 or 60 Hz. S1
should be set for the line frequency being supplied to the
injector.

WARNING: Do not use the injector in an ECG-triggered


injection if the signal cannot be stabilized. The ECG signal
displayed on the scope should be stable and the R-wave
indicator should flash with each R-wave. To avoid patient
injury or death, ensure that a reliable ECG signal before
using the injector in an ECG-triggered injection.

High-Level ECG Input


The most common way to supply an ECG input to the injector is to run
a cable from the monitor to the injector - high-level ECG input. With
this kind of connection, check it as follows:
1. Ensure that the R-WAVE light flashes with each heartbeat.
If it does not, or only occasionally, press the GAIN Up button until the R-WAVE light flashes. Hold the GAIN Up button for one second after the light flashes, to ensure that the
gain is high enough.
2. If the ECG signal is weak, reposition the patient electrodes.
3. If the light flashes erratically, the Gain might be too high.
Press the GAIN Down button to reduce flashing.
4. Check the signal supplied by the monitor. The output signal
should be +0.1 volts minimum (+0.5 volts nominal) at the Rwave peak, 10 volts maximum.
5. Check signal and ground connections at the output connector. The cable connecting the monitor to J44 on the injector
should be wired as follows:
Black wire = signal
White wire = ground

19 - 50

Troubleshooting Guide
WEAK OR ERRATIC
R-WAVES (cont.)

Low-Level ECG Input


An ECG input can also be provided directly from the patient, to the
injector. This connection is called a Low-Level input.
Insert the ECG preamp into J44 on the injector rear connector panel,
then the electrodes and patient cable as described in the Mark V/Mark
V Plus Operation Manual.
Gain and triggering adjustment procedure:
1. Ensure that the R-WAVE light flashes with each heartbeat.
If it does not, or only occasionally, press the GAIN Up button until the R-WAVE light flashes. Hold the GAIN Up button for one second after the light flashes, to ensure that the
gain is high enough.
2. If the ECG signal is weak, reposition the electrodes.
3. If the light flashes erratically, the Gain might be too high.
Press the GAIN Down button to reduce flashing.
4. If the ECG is still erratic:
While twisting and bending the electrode wires, pull
at the connections to the electrode pads and the
patient cable. If the R-WAVE light flashes randomly,
replace the electrode wires.

While twisting and bending the patient cable, pull at


the connection to the ECG preamp. If the R-WAVE
light flashes randomly, replace the patient cable.

Check the consistency and amount of electrode gel


on the electrode pads. The gel may have dried out,
resulting in poor contact.

The electrodes may be attached to hairy or oily


areas.

Pull at the connection of the ECG preamp to the


injector. If the R-WAVE light flashes randomly, call
Medrad Service.

19 - 51

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


Notes:

19 - 52

Disassembly and Reassembly

20

Disassembly and
Reassembly Procedures
This section contains recommended procedures for the disassembly
and reassembly of those portions of the injection system that can be
readily repaired in the field. If through troubleshooting and diagnosis,
a repair or replacement procedure which is not outlined in this section
is required, contact Medrad Factory Service, or your local Medrad
Service Representative.

WARNING: Hazardous voltages exist within the Mark V


and Mark V Plus Injection Systems that can shock, burn,
or cause death. To avoid injury, the system should be
opened and serviced by qualified service personnel only.
Disconnect the system from line power before cleaning or
attempting to perform any maintenance or repairs.

WARNING: Immediately disconnect the patient from the


injector if any system malfunction occurs. If a system malfunction message appears, do not attempt to use the system until the source of the condition has been identified
and corrected by qualified service personnel. Do not
attempt to recreate any fault conditions while connected to
a patient.
CAUTION: Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). Failure to follow
ESD protection practices may result in equipment damage.
ESD protection practices must be followed when servicing
any component of this system.

20 - 1

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Control Unit
Tools Required:
Medium-blade screwdriver

Control Unit
Disassembly

9/64 (3.5 mm) Hex Key

Pedestal System:
1. Remove power from the injector.
2. Loosen and remove the two screws at the rear of the Console.
3. If the injector does not have ECG trigger and scope, continue with
step 4.
NOTE: If the injector has ECG trigger and scope, remove the
four screws retaining the bottom cover of the main
Control Panel, then remove the cover. Disconnect the
ribbon cable from underneath the chassis.
4. Grasp the front bezel and pull it forward.
5. If the unit is a 20000 series Mark V Injector, skip to step 9. If the
unit is above series 60000, proceed with step 6.
6. Remove the PC cards.
7. Disconnect the two (2) harness connectors at the Motherboard.
8. If the unit contains the ECG/Scope option, remove the connector
from J44.
9. Disconnect harness mount clamp and ground wire.
10. Slide the chassis out of the case.

Control Room Console:


1. Remove power from the injector.
2. Loosen the two screws (either slotted or 9/64 (3.5 mm) hex key
screws) at the top of the Control Panel.
3. Tilt the Control Panel downward.

20 - 2

Disassembly and Reassembly

Control Unit - (continued)


Control Unit
Reassembly

Pedestal System:
1. Slide the chassis into the case, aligning the chassis with the sides
of the case.
2. If the unit is a 20000 series Mark V Injector, skip to step 6. If the
unit is above series 60000, proceed with step 3.
3. Connect the chassis harness connectors to the Motherboard.
4. Connect the ground wire and J44 connector (if unit contains ECG/
Scope option).
5. Fasten harness mounting clamp, and install the PC cards.
6. Push the chassis in until the rear of the bezel is flush with the front
of the case.
7. Install and tighten the two screws at the rear of the Console.
8. If the injector contains the ECG/Scope option, install the ribbon
cable connecting the Control Panel and the chassis. Replace the
bottom cover on the Control Panel and retain with the four screws
previously removed.

Control Room Console:


1. Tilt the Control Panel upward, and close.
2. Tighten the two screws (either slotted or hex key) at the top of the
Control Panel.

20 - 3

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Control Unit - PC Cards


PC Card Removal

1. (-I CRC units only) Remove the chassis shield plate by removing
the two thumbscrews.
2. In Pedestal Systems, remove the card retainer from across the top
of the cards. In a Control Room Console, remove the card retainer
brackets from across the edges of the cards.
3. If the CPU or I/O Card is being removed, disconnect the ribbon
cable connector from the I/O Card.
4. Lift the inside edge of the ejector tabs on the card being removed,
then slide the card out.

PC Card
Replacement

1. Identify the proper slot for reinsertion if more than one card was
removed.

Card
CPU Card
I/O Card
Servo Control Card
PPI Card
ISI Card (or dummy card)

Ejector Tab color


White
Violet
Green
Yellow
Red (none on dummy card)

2. Align the card with the proper PC card guides.

When facing the front of a Pedestal System, components


are located on the right side of the PC cards.

In a Control Room Console, card components face


upward.

3. Insert the card into its respective slot, and align card edge connector fingers with connectors on Motherboard. Push the card firmly
to ensure that it is securely seated in the Motherboard.
4. If the CPU or I/O Cards are being replaced, fully insert the I/O ribbon cable into connector.
5. In Pedestal Systems, reposition the card retainer across the top of
the cards. In Control Room Console systems, reposition the card
retainers across the front edges of the cards.
6. (-I CRC units only) Replace and secure the shield plate with the
two thumbscrews previously removed.

20 - 4

Disassembly and Reassembly

Control Panel - Overlay


Replacement part numbers:
Mark V (Brown):

78101-05-AM-02

Mark V Plus (Blue) English: 78101-05-AM-03


Mark V Plus (Blue) German: 78101-T-173

*Contact MEDRAD for other language availability


Tools Required:
Medium-blade screwdriver

Overlay Removal

9/64 (3.5 mm) Hex Key

NOTE: If the system is equipped with the ECG/Scope option,


do not attempt to remove the ECG/Scope Control
Panel. Medrad Service does not recommend field
repair of the ECG and Scope. The procedure below is
directed toward the removal of the Main Control Panel
only, located below the ECG/Scope systems.

Pedestal Systems Without ECG Trigger and Scope:


1. Remove power from the injector.
2. Remove chassis from Console.
3. Position the chassis upright with control panel face-down, and
remove the four mounting screws on the inside edges of the Control Panel bezel.
4. Disconnect the display board ribbon cable at the Display Card by
pulling the locking tabs to the sides and removing the ribbon cable
from the connector.
5. Remove chassis from Control Panel bezel, then set aside.
6. Remove the two screws securing the keyboard to the bezel.
7. Remove the six screws linking the Keyboard Overlay and the Display Card, then disconnect the overlay connector.

Pedestal Systems With ECG Trigger and Scope:


1. Remove power from the injector.
2. Remove the four screws retaining the bottom cover of the main
Control Panel.
3. Disconnect the display board ribbon cable by pulling the locking
tabs to the sides and removing the connector.
4. Remove the four screws attaching the Control Panel to the bezel.
Lift out the Control Panel assembly.
20 - 5

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Control Panel - Overlay (continued)


5. Remove the two screws securing the keyboard to the bezel.
6. Remove the six screws linking the Keyboard Overlay and the Display Card, then disconnect the overlay connector.

Control Room Console Systems:


1. Remove power from the injector.
2. Loosen the two screws at the top of the Control Panel.
3. Tilt the Control Panel downward.
4. (-I units only) Remove Front Panel shield.
5. Disconnect the ribbon cable at the Display Card connector.
6. Remove the six screws securing the Display Card and keyboard
overlay to the front bezel.
7. Remove the six screws securing the Display Card to the keyboard
overlay, then disconnect the overlay connector.

Overlay Replacement

Pedestal Systems Without ECG Trigger and Scope:


1. Connect the overlay connector to the Display Card, then install the
six screws mounting the overlay to the keyboard.
2. Place the keyboard and overlay in the bezel with the top of the
keyboard positioned near the slots in the bezel, then install the two
mounting screws.
3. Place the Control Panel assembly face-down, and position the
chassis on the bezel.
4. Connect the display board ribbon cable at the Input/Output Card.
Ensure that the locking tabs are properly positioned to secure the
connector.
5. Replace the four screws along the inside edges of the Control
Panel bezel.

Pedestal Systems With ECG Trigger and Scope:


1. Connect the overlay connector to the Display Card, then install the
six screws mounting the overlay to the keyboard.
2. Lower the Control Panel assembly into the bezel, then install the
two mounting screws.
3. Retain with the four screws previously removed.
4. Connect the display board ribbon cable. Ensure that the locking
tabs are properly positioned to secure the connector.

20 - 6

Disassembly and Reassembly

Control Panel - Overlay (continued)


5. Fasten the bottom cover of the Control Panel with the four screws
previously removed.

Control Room Console Systems:


1. Connect the overlay connector to the Display Card, the install the
six screws to fasten the keyboard overlay to the Display Card.
2. Install the keyboard overlay / Display Card assembly on the Control Panel, ensuring that the assembly is correctly positioned.
Tighten the six screws securing the assembly to the Control
Panel.
3. Install the ribbon cable on the Display Card connector, ensuring
that the locking tabs are correctly positioned.
4. (-I units only) Install the Front Panel shield with the two thumbscrews previously removed.
5. Tilt the Control Panel upward to close.
6. Secure the two screws at the top of the Control Panel.

20 - 7

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Motherboard
This procedure applies to Pedestal Systems only. Replacement of
CRC motherboards requires major disassembly, and should be performed by Medrad Service personnel.
Tools Required:
Medium-blade screwdriver

Motherboard
Removal

5/16 (8 mm) wrench

1. Remove the injector power cord from the power source.


2. Remove the top chassis as described in Control Unit Disassembly, page 20-1.
3. Place the chassis assembly on a suitable work surface. Remove
the PC card retainer (bail). Disconnect the ribbon cable at the top
of the I/O Card that runs to the keyboard. If the system is equipped
with ECG/Scope, also disconnect the ribbon cable from the I/O
Card that connects to these options.
4. Remove all PC cards from the card cage in the console. (These all
plug into the Motherboard.) If the system is equipped with ECG
and scope, do not disturb the option assembly.

CAUTION: Do not set the PPI Card or battery driven PPI


chips on any conductive surface. Immediate battery discharge may result.

5. Remove the two lower keyboard bezel retaining screws. Loosen


but do not remove the two upper keyboard bezel retaining screws.
Remove the keyboard bezel assembly from the chassis. Disconnect the I/O cable from the Display Card.
6a. (20000 series Mark V units) Remove the six rear PC card guides
from the card cage by prying carefully with a medium blade screwdriver. Disconnect the two chassis harness connectors at the
Motherboard.
6b. (Above 60000 series Mark V Plus units) Remove the screws
securing the rear PC card guide plate, then remove plate. Disconnect the two harness connectors at the motherboard. (Multinational units card shields will be removed with the rear card
guide. It may be necessary to remove the front card guide to
access the screws located at the front of the motherboard.
7. Remove the Motherboard retaining screws and hardware.
Remove the Motherboard from the card cage.

20 - 8

Disassembly and Reassembly

Motherboard - (continued)
8. Install the replacement Motherboard into the card cage. Install the
Motherboard hardware removed in step 6a or 6b, but do not
secure fully.
9. Connect the chassis harness connectors to the Motherboard.
10a. (20000 series Mark V units)
Install the PC guide plate or PC card guides for the I/O and PPI
cards. Install these guides with the V notch on the guide facing
upward.
10b. (Above 60000 series Mark V Plus units)
Install card guide plate(s). Install the I/O and PPI Cards, ensuring
that they are properly seated in the Motherboard connectors. As
these cards are installed, the Motherboard will align with the chassis. Secure the Motherboard by tightening the two center retaining
screws.
Remove the I/O and PPI Cards and tighten the remaining screws.
It may be necessary to remove the front card guide plate to tighten
the front screws.
11. (20000 series Mark V units only) Install the remaining four PC card
guides with the V notch facing upward.
12. Install the keyboard and bezel assembly.
13. Install the PC cards into the card cage. Ensure that the cards are
fully seated into the Motherboard connectors.
14. Connect the ribbon cable (or cables) to the I/O Card.
15. Install the card retainer across the top of the cards.
16. Install the chassis into the console case. Install and tighten the two
chassis retaining screws.
17. Perform the basic checkout (Section 5) to verify that the system
functions correctly.

20 - 9

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Cord Reel
This procedure applies to non -I Pedestal Systems only.
Replacement Part Numbers:
Start Cord Reel:

(2) Faston Terminals:

Film Changer Cord Reel:

(2) Faston Terminals:


(2) Faston Terminals:

KSP-522
525-3125-180
KSP-521
525-3125-180
525-3118-180

Tools Required:
Small-blade screwdriver

Cord Reel Removal

Medium-blade screwdriver

Soldering iron and solder

Needle-nose pliers

Wire cutters / strippers

1. Remove the injector power cord from the power source.


2. Disconnect the Injector Head Cable from the rear connector panel.
3. Remove the handswitch or connector from the cord reel being
replaced. Before removing, make a sketch that depicts the connections and colors of wires in the cord reel being replaced.
4. Loosen the four captive screws securing the cord reel door.
5. Loosen the two captive screws securing the column door, then
open the door.
6. Remove the four screws on the connector panel assembly. Slide
the assembly out, then rotate the assembly upside down to
expose the wiring.
7. Make a sketch depicting the connections and colors of the wires
from the cord reel being replaced.
8. On the connector panel assembly, disconnect the wires to the
cord reel being replaced.
9. Pull the cord reel out of the compartment.

20 - 10

Disassembly and Reassembly

Cord Reel - (continued)


Cord Reel
Replacement

1. Route the new cord reel cable through the hole in the case or rear
panel, depending on which cord reel is being replaced.
2. Position the cord reel, allowing the exit hole to face the direction
that the cable feeds out of the column. Align the feet on the cord
reel with the slots in the compartment, then slide the cord reel into
the column.
NOTE: The side of the cord reel contains a notch to be positioned in such a way that allows the cord reel door to
be closed.
3. Attach the ball and handswitch, or connector previously removed.
For the proper connections, refer to the sketch made in step 3 on
the page 20 - 10.
4. Feed the supply cable into the column to the terminal strip on the
connector plate assembly. Attach the wires from the cord reel to
the appropriate connections. For proper connections, refer to the
sketch made in step 7 on the page 20 - 10.
NOTE: Install Faston terminals as required.
5. Replace the connector panel assembly and retain with the four
screws previously removed.
6. Replace the cord reel door, then tighten the four captive screws.
7. Close the column door, then tighten the two captive screws.
8. Connect the Injector Head Cable to the rear connector panel.

20 - 11

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Power Chassis
This procedure applies to Pedestal Systems only.
Tools Required:
Small-blade screwdriver
Power Chassis
Removal

1. Remove the injector power cord from the power source.


2. Disconnect the cable(s) from the rear connector panel.
3. Loosen the two captive screws securing the column door, then
open the door.
4. Grasp the handle (or choke) at the top of the chassis, then slowly
pull the chassis out of the column.
NOTE: Above 60000 series Mark V Plus units, pull only until
two Molex connectors are clearly visible, disconnect
the Molex connectors, then remove the chassis from
the column. In Multinational units, disconnect the
Molex connectors and the ground wire, then remove
the chassis from the unit.

Power Chassis
Replacement

1. Align the bottom of the chassis with the slots in the column.
NOTE: Above 60000 series Mark V Plus units, the two Molex
style connectors must be reconnected before fully
inserting the Power Chassis. In Multinational units,
connect the ground wire and two Molex connectors
before inserting the chassis.
2. Slide the chassis into the column; align the connector and insert
into the column until the chassis is fully seated.
NOTE: It may be necessary to hold the front of the column with
one hand as the chassis is inserted into the column.
3. Close the column door, then tighten the two captive screws.
4. Connect the cable(s) to the rear connector panel.

20 - 12

Disassembly and Reassembly

Power Chassis - PC Boards


This procedure applies to Pedestal Systems only.
NOTES:

The Power Chassis can be in or out of the column.


Card locations are as follows:

Figure 20.1: Power Chassis Card Orientation

PC Board Removal

1. Grasp the edge of the card and pull back to slide the card out of
the chassis.

PC Board
Replacement

1. Align the edges of the card with the card guides, then slide the
card into the chassis until fully seated.
NOTE: The Power Drive Card may be easier to install with the
chassis out of the column, in order to align the connector and the card.

20 - 13

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Injector Head - Covers


Tools Required:
Medium-blade screwdriver
Cover Removal

1. Before disassembly, fully reverse the plunger, then remove unit


power.
2. The injector head can remain on the arm, or be placed on a padded surface.
3. Position the injector head upside down. Remove the four screws
retaining the bottom cover, then remove bottom cover.
NOTE: This point in the procedure is sufficient for syringe
heater repair. Proceed with the next step if any other
injector head servicing is required.
4. Remove the two hole plugs from the knob and lever on the rear of
the injector head.
5. While holding the round piston control knob, loosen the screw
inside the knob several turns without removing the screw. When
the screw is loose, remove the knob from the shaft.
6. While holding the plunger rotation knob, remove the screw inside,
then remove the knob from the shaft.
7. Remove the four screws holding the top cover to the assembly,
then remove the top cover.
NOTE: If the injector head is mounted on the arm, the top
cover must be held as the last screw is removed to prevent the cover from falling.

Cover Replacement

1. Position the top cover face down on the work surface. Place the
injector head (upside down) over the top cover and install the four
screws which secure the cover to the head assembly.
2. Position the bottom cover on the injector head, then install the four
screws previously removed.
3. Install the plunger rotation lever with the screw previously
removed.
4. Position the plunger knob on the shaft, then tighten the screw
inside.
5. Install the hole caps on the two knobs.

20 - 14

Disassembly and Reassembly

Injector Head - Syringe Heater


Replacement Part Numbers:
Syringe Heater:KSP-509
Tools Required:
Medium blade screwdriver

Syringe Heater
Removal

Pin Extractor

3/8 open end wrench or small adjustable wrench

Ruler

1. Remove unit power. Disconnect the injector head from the Injector
Unit and place upside down on a suitable work surface.
2. Remove the four bottom cover retainer screws, and remove cover.
3. Disconnect the P29/J29 syringe heater cable connector.
4. With the pin extractor, remove the white and black wires/pins from
the J29 connector of the syringe heater. If a pin extractor is not
available, use a small blade screwdriver to depress the pin tangs,
and pull the pin from the connector. Retain the J29 connector
housing for use in reassembly.
5. Note the placement of the following parts for use in reassembly. If
there is a ferrite core on the syringe heater cable, remove and
retain for later use. Unscrew and remove the strain relief from the
front casting. Remove strain relief from heater cable and retain for
use in reassembly. Push on the cable to expose the O-ring, then
remove and discard. Remove heater and cable from front casting,
and discard.

Syringe Heater
Replacement

1. Install cable into front casting. Install replacement O-ring and


strain relief on cable sheath. Install the strain relief and tighten
securely.
NOTE: The heater cable sheath should protrude 1/8 to 1/4
beyond the strain relief when properly positioned (see
Figure 20.2).
2. Loop the wires through the ferrite core (if applicable).
3. Install the wires/pins into the J29 connector housing (white -Pin 1,
black -Pin 2). Ensure that the tangs lock into place when inserting
pins into the connector housing. After installing the wires/pins,
gently tug on each wire to verify that the pins are secured in the
connector.

20 - 15

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Injector Head - Syringe Heater

(continued)

4. Reconnect the P29/J29 connectors and the injector head to the


injector unit, and apply unit power. The heater should feel warm
within a few minutes. If the over-temperature light illuminates,
place the syringe heater on a pressure jacket; the light should
extinguish within a few minutes. If the over temperature light
remains lit, the syringe heater is defective.
5. After verifying correct heater operation, remove unit power. Reinstall the bottom cover and retainer screws.

Figure 20.2: Syringe Heater Cable and J29 Connector

20 - 16

Disassembly and Reassembly

Injector Head - Plunger Position Pot


The removal and replacement of the Plunger Position Pot requires
major disassembly, reassembly, calibration and checkout of the injector head. The procedures for this operation are included here, however, we do not recommend field repair of this item, but suggest that
the injector head be returned to Medrad Service.
Replacement Part Numbers:
Plunger Position Pot:

KSP-513

Tools Required:
Medium-blade screwdriver

Plunger Pot Removal

Soldering iron and solder

Needle-nose pliers

Wire cutters / strippers

Digital voltmeter (DVM)

Cable ties

1. Apply power to the injector, then ensure that the 150 ml syringe
size is selected. If 60 or 200 ml is selected, press RECALL, 50,
RECALL, then the appropriate number to select 150 ml. Set the
injector parameters as follows:
Flow Rate 10 ml/sec

Volume 10 ml

Pressure 600 psi

2. Reverse the plunger to the rear limit, then remove unit power.
3. Position the injector head (which can remain on the arm or be
placed on a padded surface) upside down.
4. Remove the four screws which retain the bottom cover, then
remove the bottom cover. If using a dual pot, discard the bottom
head cover if the notch is not present (see Figure 20.4) and a dual
pot is being used.
5. Remove the two hole plugs from the plunger knob and plunger
rotation lever on the rear of the injector head.
6. While holding the plunger knob, loosen the screw several turns
then remove the knob from the shaft.
7. While holding the plunger rotation lever, remove the screw inside,
then remove the lever from the shaft.
8. Remove the four screws securing the top cover. Remove the top
cover.
9. Position the injector head top side up.

20 - 17

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Injector Head - Plunger Position Pot (continued)


10. Note the position of wires, head cable, and metal clamp. Remove
cable ties. Remove the two screws securing the cable bracket. If
the old style cable bracket is in place and a dual pot is being used,
remove the metal clamp and discard the cable bracket. Refer to
figure 20.4 for cable bracket identification.
11. Disconnect the wires from the plunger pot.
12. Remove the two screws securing the pot bracket, then remove the
pot assembly. Retain screws and discard the old pot assembly.

Plunger Pot
Replacement

1. Hold the pot assembly with the gear facing away from you. Turn
the gear counter-clockwise until the gear turns no further. Rotate
the gear clockwise 1/4 turn.
2. Install the new pot assembly with the two screws previously
removed. The pot assembly cannot be tightened until pot calibration is complete.
3. Carefully reattach the wires and solder (refer to the chart below).
Ensure that the wires are positioned away from moving parts.

TERMINAL
1
2
3

Mark V

Mark V Plus

3
1

white/blue
white/green

white/yellow

white/violet

Figure 20.3: Plunger Pot Terminal Identification


4. For the following measurements, connect the DVM ground to terminal 3 on the plunger position pot.
5. Apply power. Disregard any messages that may appear on the
Sentinel. Advance the plunger at least 2 ml to satisfy the plunger
pot test, then reverse the plunger to the rear limit (software version
3.3 and above only).
6. Measure the wiper voltage on terminal 2 of the plunger position
pot. With the pot disengaged, turn the pot shaft gear until the voltage reads 0.250 VDC +0/-0.020 VDC.
7. Reengage the pot gear, maintaining the voltage as measured in
the previous step, and tighten the pot screws. Ensure that the
gears do not jam.

20 - 18

Disassembly and Reassembly

Injector Head - Plunger Position Pot (continued)


8. Arm the injector. When the Mechanical Stop is in position, measure the wiper voltage on the white/yellow wire (or white/green on
Plus heads) of the mechanical stop pot. The voltage must be
0.860 VDC +/-0.020 VDC. If voltage is within specification, skip to
step 14.
9. Disconnect one of the mechanical stop motor leads. Manually
move the Mechanical Stop plate forward approximately 1/8 inch
(3.2 mm).
10. Advance the plunger until the plunger position pot wiper voltage
(terminal 2) is 1.010 VDC.
11. Manually reverse the Mechanical Stop plate into the plunger plate
until the mechanical stop microswitch opens (noted by an audible
click). The DVM can be used on the microswitch to detect when
the microswitch opens.
12. Disengage the Mechanical Stop pot and adjust for 0.860 VDC.
13. Reengage the pot gear, and tighten the pot bracket screws.
Reverse plunger to the rear limit. Disconnect DVM from head,
then reconnect the Mechanical Stop motor lead.
14. Remove injector power. Ensure that all pot screws are secure,
then install the new style cable bracket on the rear casting. See
Figure 20.4.
15. If required, attach the metal clamp and head cable on the cable
bracket.
16. Secure the wires and head cable with cable ties.
17. If a dual pot and new style head cover are being used, ensure that
the bottom head cover is notched.
18. Reassemble the injector head.
19. Ensure that the proper syringe size is selected (look at the indicators on the injector head). If the incorrect syringe size is selected,
press RECALL, 50, RECALL, then select the proper syringe size.

Figure 20.4: Head Covers and Cable Brackets


20 - 19

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Injector Head - Mechanical Stop Pot


Removal and replacement of the Mechanical Stop Pot requires extensive disassembly, reassembly, calibration and checkout. Although the
procedures are included here, we do not recommend field repair of
this item, and suggest that the injector head be returned to Medrad for
these repairs.
Replacement Part Numbers:
Mechanical Stop Pot: KSP-514
Tools Required:
Medium-blade screwdriver

Pot Removal

Soldering iron and solder

Needle-nose pliers

Wire cutters / strippers

Digital voltmeter (DVM)

Cable ties

1. After removal of the injector head covers, position the injector


head (which can remain on the arm or be placed on a padded surface) upside down.
2. Apply power to the injector, then ensure that the 150 ml syringe
size is selected. If 60 or 200 ml is selected, press RECALL, 50,
RECALL, then the appropriate number to select 150 ml. Set the
injection parameters as follows: Flow Rate 10 ml/sec, Volume 10
ml, Pressure 600 psi.
3. Reverse the piston to the rear limit, then remove unit power.
4. Manually reverse the stop plate to the rear limit, then disconnect
one of the motor leads.
5. If necessary, remove cable ties in order to avoid cable interference.
6. Carefully remove the wires on the pot.
7. Remove the screws holding the pot bracket, to remove the pot
assembly.

Pot Replacement

1. Hold the pot assembly with the gear facing away from you. Rotate
the gear counter-clockwise until it stops turning, then rotate the
gear 1/4 turn clockwise.
2. Install the new pot assembly with the two screws previously
removed. The pot assembly cannot be tightened until pot calibration is complete.

20 - 20

Disassembly and Reassembly

Injector Head - Mechanical Stop Pot (continued)


3. Carefully reattach the wires and solder (refer to the chart below).
Ensure that the wires are positioned away from moving parts.
3
TERMINAL
1
2
3

Mark V

Mark V Plus

white/blue
white/yellow

white/green

white/violet

Figure 20.5: Mechanical Stop Pot Terminal Identification.


4. For the following measurements, connect the DVM ground to terminal
3 on the plunger position pot.
5. Apply power. Disregard any messages that may appear on the Sentinel. Advance moveable stop forward approximately 5/8. Advance the
plunger at least 2 ml to satisfy the plunger pot test, then reverse the
plunger to the rear limit.
6. Measure the wiper voltage on terminal 2 of the plunger position pot.
This voltage should read 0.250 VDC +0/-0.020 VDC. If the reading is
not within specification, loosen the screws securing the plunger pot,
then disengage the gear to rotate to the correct setting. Re-engage the
pot gear.
7. Advance the plunger until the plunger position pot wiper voltage (terminal 2) is 1.010 VDC.
8. Manually reverse the Mechanical Stop plate into the plunger plate until
the mechanical stop microswitch opens (noted by an audible click).
The DVM can be used on the microswitch to detect when the
microswitch opens.
9. With a DVM, measure the voltage at terminal 2 of the Mechanical Stop
pot. Disengage the pot gear, then set pot for a reading of 0.860 +/-0.02
VDC.
10. Reengage pot gear and tighten pot bracket screws, then reverse
plunger to the rear limit. Ensure that the mechanical stop pot gear and
the acme screw gear are making positive contact and are not meshed
too tightly.
11. Disconnect the DVM from the head, then reconnect the Mechanical
Stop motor lead. Mechanical stop will move forward.
12. Remove injector power.
13. Ensure that all pot screws are secure, then reassemble the injector
head.

20 - 21

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Injector Head - Plunger Motor Drive Belt


Removal and replacement of the Plunger Motor Drive Belt requires
extensive disassembly, reassembly, calibration and checkout.
Although the procedures are included here, we do not recommend
field repair of this item, and suggest that the injector head be returned
to Medrad for these repairs.

Replacement Part Numbers:


Plunger Motor Drive Belt:

KSP-563 or A-403-9042

Tools Required:
Medium-blade screwdrivers (2)

Drive Belt Removal

7/64 Hex Key

1. After disassembly of the injector head, remove the two screws


securing the cable bracket on the rear of the injector head, and the
two screws securing the limit switch.
2. Remove the belt from the rear of the motor gear by rotating the
gear while removing the belt from the large drive pulley.

Drive Belt
Replacement

1. Position the replacement belt over the flanged motor gear. Align
the belt teeth with the teeth of the large drive pulley, then begin to
slide the belt onto the gear.
2. Rotate the gear while pushing the belt onto the large drive pulley.
The belt need not be centered on the gear; the belt will become
centered as the motor turns.

CAUTION: The drive belt must be tightly secured. If not


sufficiently tightened, the belt could jump from the gear
teeth at high pressures. Equipment failure or malfunction
may result.

NOTE: If it is necessary to tighten the drive belt, loosen the


four screws securing the drive motor. Apply tension to
the drive belt by prying the motor case with a screwdriver, then tighten the four motor screws. Repeat this
process as required until the belt does not slip during a
full pressure injection. Refer to Figure 20.6.

20 - 22

Disassembly and Reassembly

Injector Head - Plunger Motor Drive Belt (cont.)

Figure 20.6: Belt Tension Adjustment

Follow these guidelines when applying tension to the drive belt:


Use a medium blade screwdriver, not longer than 6 inches
(15 cm).

After securing the belt, check the injector at the maximum


pressure (1400 psi at 60 ml, 1200 psi at 150 ml or, 1000
psi at 200 ml) to ensure proper operation.

If the belt is too tight, decreased motor speed may result.

3. Install the cable bracket and limit switch removed in belt removal
step 1.
4. Reassemble the injector head. (See the procedure on page 20 14.)

20 - 23

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Injector Head - Plunger Drive Motor


Removal and replacement of the Plunger Drive Motor Drive requires
extensive disassembly, reassembly, calibration and checkout.
Although the procedures are included here, we do not recommend
field repair of this item, and suggest that the injector head be returned
to Medrad for these repairs.
Replacement Part Numbers:
Plunger Drive Motor:

KSP-581 or A-403-0540

Tools Required:
Medium-blade screwdrivers (2)

Motor Removal

7/64 Hex Key

1. After disassembly of the injector head, remove the drive belt (see
page 20 - 22).
2. Position the injector head with the front plate facing downward.
3. Note the position of the motor leads for re-termination, then carefully pull the connectors from the motor terminals.
4. Remove the four screws, lock washers, and washers securing the
motor to the rear casting, then remove the motor, ensuring that the
drive belt remains in position.

Motor Replacement

1. Orient the replacement motor in the injector head with the motor
spade terminals pointing downward.
2. Install the motor, putting the gear through the drive belt and securing the four screws, lock washers, and washers which hold the
motor, but do not tighten. Ensure that the belt is properly seated
on the drive pulley.
3. Connect the wires to the motor terminals as follows:

Figure 20.7: Plunger Motor Terminal Orientation


20 - 24

Disassembly and Reassembly

Injector Head - Plunger Drive Motor (continued)


CAUTION: The drive belt must be tightly secured. If not
sufficiently tightened, the belt could jump from the gear
teeth at high pressures. Equipment failure or malfunction
may result.

NOTE: To adjust drive belt tension, apply tension to the belt by


prying the motor case with a screwdriver, then tighten
the four motor screws. Refer to Figure 20.6.
Follow these guidelines when applying tension to the drive belt:
Use a medium blade screwdriver, not longer than 6 inches
(15 cm).

After securing the belt, check the injector at the maximum


pressure (1400 psi at 60 ml, 1200 psi at 150 ml or, 1000
psi at 200 ml) to ensure proper operation.

If the belt is too tight, decreased motor speed may result.

4. Reassemble the injector head. (See the procedure on page 20 14.)

20 - 25

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Injector

Mechanical Stop Motor


Head - (with Type 2 Bracket)

This procedure applies to H5S and H5SU injector heads with a Type 2
motor bracket.
NOTE: If the injector head being serviced is equipped with a
Type 1 motor bracket, contact Medrad Service for an
updated Type 2 bracket. Refer to Figure 20.8a.
Replacement Part Numbers:
Mechanical Stop Motor:

KSP-580

Tools Required:
Medium and small flat blade screwdrivers
Motor Removal

1. After removal of the injector head covers, position the head with
the front plate facing down.
2. Carefully pull the connectors from the motor terminals.
3. Remove the screw from the spring plate and the mechanical stop
bracket.
NOTE: Do not move the Mechanical Stop Belt, pulleys, or
idlers, after removal of the motor and bracket.
4. Note motor terminal orientation, then carefully remove the motor
and bracket assembly. Do not move the belt, pulleys, or idlers.
5. Remove the three screws securing the motor to the bracket.

Motor Replacement

1. As shown below, install the replacement motor on the motor


bracket with the three screws previously removed:
Motor Mount Types 1 and 2

NOTE: Motor Terminals in the above illustration are facing


away from the line of sight.

Figure 20.8a: Mechanical Stop Motor Mount Configuration


20 - 26

Disassembly and Reassembly

Injector

Mechanical Stop Motor


Head - (with Type 2 Bracket, cont.)

2. Orient the replacement motor in the injector head with the motor
terminals facing the bottom of the injector head. Position the gear
on the motor, allowing the gear to engage with the belt (which
should be engaged with all other pulleys and idlers).

3. Secure the motor and bracket assembly with the Mechanical Stop
screws previously removed.
4. Install the wire connectors on the motor terminals.
Violet to Motor (+)

No. 1

Yellow to Motor (-)

No. 2

5. Reassemble the injector head. (See the procedure on page 20 14.)

20 - 27

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Injector

Mechanical Stop Motor


Head - (with Type 3 Bracket)

This procedure applies to H5S and H5SU injector heads with a Type 3
motor bracket.
Replacement Part Numbers:
Mechanical Stop Motor: KSP-580
Tools Required:
Medium and small flat blade screwdrivers
Motor Removal

1. After removal of the injector head covers, position the head with
the front plate facing down.
2. Carefully pull the connectors from the motor terminals.
3. Disengage the tension spring from the spring post on the front
plate.
NOTE: Do not move the Mechanical Stop Belt, pulleys, or
idlers, after removal of the motor and bracket.
4. Remove the Mechanical Stop bracket screw.
5. Note motor terminal orientation, then carefully remove the motor
and bracket assembly. Do not move the belt, pulleys, or idlers.
6. Remove the three screws securing the motor to the bracket.

Motor Replacement

1. As shown below, install the motor on the motor bracket with the
three screws previously removed:
Motor Mount Type 3

NOTE: Motor Terminals in the above illustration are facing


away from the line of sight.

Figure 20.8b: Mechanical Stop Motor Mount Configuration

20 - 28

Disassembly and Reassembly

Injector

Mechanical Stop Motor


Head - (with Type 3 Bracket, cont.)

2. Orient the replacement motor in the injector head with the motor
terminals facing the bottom of the injector head. Position the gear
on the motor, allowing the gear to engage with the belt (which
should be engaged with all other pulleys).

3. Secure the motor and bracket assembly with the Mechanical Stop
screw previously removed.
4. Install the tension spring on the spring post of the front plate.
5. Install the wire connectors on the motor terminals.
Violet to Motor (+)

No. 1

Yellow to Motor (-)

No. 2

6. Reassemble the injector head. (See the procedure on page 20 14.)

20 - 29

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Injector

Mechanical Stop Motor


Head - (with Type 4 Bracket)

This procedure applies to H5SU, H5P, and H5M injector heads with a
Type 4 motor bracket.
Replacement Part Numbers:
Mechanical Stop Motor: KSP-580
Tools Required:
Medium and small flat blade screwdrivers
Motor Removal

1. After removal of the injector head covers, position the head with
the front plate facing down.
2. Carefully pull the connectors from the motor terminals.
3. Disengage the tension spring from the front plate spring post.
4. Remove the E-clip and wave spring. Note the placement and
direction of the wave spring.
5. Remove the Mechanical Stop belt from the movable stop assembly pulley on the opposite side of the pivot knuckle.
6. Disengage the belt from the Mechanical Stop motor gear.
7. Remove the motor and bracket assembly (in a rotating and lifting
motion) from the mounting pin.
NOTE: Do not move the Mechanical Stop Belt, pulleys or
idlers, after removal of the motor and bracket.
8. Remove the three screws securing the motor to the bracket.

Motor Replacement

1. As shown below, install the motor on the motor bracket with the
three screws previously removed:
Motor Mount Type 4

NOTE: Motor Terminals in the above illustration are facing


away from the line of sight.

Figure 20.8c: Mechanical Stop Motor Mount Configuration


20 - 30

Disassembly and Reassembly

Injector

Mechanical Stop Motor


Head - (with Type 4 Bracket, cont.)

2. Install the motor and bracket assembly on the mounting pin in a


rotating and downward motion.
3. Position the belt on the mechanical stop gear.

4. Position the belt on the movable stop assembly pulley on the


opposite side of the pivot knuckle.
5. Install the previously removed wave spring and E-clip on the
mounting post. Ensure that the E-clip is seated in the groove on
the post.
6. Reattach the spring to the spring post.
7. Install the wire connectors on the motor terminals as follows:
Violet to Motor (+)

No. 1

Yellow to Motor (-)

No. 2

8. Reassemble the injector head. (See the procedure on page 20 14.)

20 - 31

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Injector Head - Control Panel


NOTE: Removal and replacement of the injector head Control
Panel requires major disassembly of the injector head.
Although the procedures are included here, Medrad
does not recommended field repair of these items, and
suggests that the injector head be returned to Medrad
Service for these repairs.
Replacement part numbers:
Control Panel for H5S or H5SU: KSP-564

Control Panel for H5P:

KSP-764

(English)

Control Panel for H5P:

KSP-764-2

(German)

Control Panel for H5M:

KSP-964-1

(English)

Control Panel for H5M:

KSP-964-2

(German)

*Contact MEDRAD for other language availability

Tools Required:
Medium-blade screwdriver

Control Panel
Removal

9/16 open end wrench

Small-blade screwdriver

1/16 hex wrench

1/4 open end wrench

For H5P and H5M heads only:


See page 20 - 33 for H5S and H5SU procedures.
1. After disassembly (see page 20 - 14), place the Injector Head topside up.
2. Remove the four flat-head screws mounting the Control Panel to
the top of the Injector Head.
3. Remove the screw and nut securing the arm lamps to the plate.
4. Remove the head cable connectors, then carefully remove the
Control Panel and attached board.
5. Remove the screws mounting the Head Card and card shield to
the plate. Disconnect the ribbon cable at the connector.

20 - 32

Disassembly and Reassembly

Injector Head - Control Panel (continued)


Control Panel
Replacement

For H5P and H5M heads only:


See page 20 - 34 for H5S and H5SU procedures.
1. Reconnect the ribbon cable from the push-button switch to the PC
card.
2. Place the top plate and card on a smooth flat surface, top side
down.
3. Gently tilt the card upward, placing the card (component side
down) on the top plate.
NOTE: Use extreme caution to avoid creasing of the ribbon
cable.
4. Mount the PC card and card shield to the top plate with screws
previously removed, ensuring that the ribbon cable is properly
positioned, not crimped or pinched.
5. Position the Top Plate on the head, then mount with the four
screws previously removed.
6. Attach Head Cable connectors and arm lamps.
7. Connect the Injector Head Cable to the rear connector panel of
the injector, then apply power to the system. Ensure that the
plunger moves freely in both the forward and reverse directions.
8. Arm the injector. Verify that the head will arm properly.
9. If the Injector Head is functioning properly, reassemble following
the procedure on page 20 - 14.

Control Panel
Removal

For H5S and H5SU heads only:


See page 20 - 32 for H5P and H5M procedures.
1. After disassembly of the injector head (see page 20 - 14), position
the head top side up.
2. Disconnect the flat cable by pulling up on the blue connector.
3. Remove the top overlay by peeling right to left to work the overlay
over the lamp socket.
4. Remove the cable ties from the stand-off.
5. Remove the four flat head screws securing the top plate to the
head, then carefully tilt the plate back.
6. Remove the arm lamp lens cover, then using a 9/16 (14 mm)
wrench, remove the nut and lock washer from the lamp base to
allow the lamp base to be pulled through the top plate.

20 - 33

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Injector Head - Control Panel (continued)


Control Panel
Replacement

For H5S and H5SU heads only:


See page 20 - 33 for H5P and H5M procedures.
1. Remove the backing from the replacement overlay. Position the
lamp socket through the hole in the overlay, then carefully align
the overlay with the pivot knuckle edge of the top plate. Press the
overlay firmly into place.
2. Remove the covering protecting the overlay.
3. Mount the lamp socket to the top plate with the nut and lock
washer previously removed. Ensure that the bend in the wires
faces the rear of the injector head.
4. Position the top plate flat on the injector head. Align the 4 holes in
the plate with those holes in the head. Secure top plate with four
screws previously removed.
NOTE: Ensure that the plate rests flat on the mounting surface
and that the lamp wires are not pinched under the top
plate.
5. Insert the ribbon cable plug. Drape it flat over the side of the injector head without twisting the ribbon cable.
6. Ensure that wire routing and tying are done properly when replacing the Control Panel. After the panels are installed, apply power
to the system. Advance the plunger forward and reverse with the
load switch. Watch closely for any interference or binding.
7. Set up an injection, and allow the Mechanical Stop to position
itself, watching closely for any interference or binding.
8. If the Injector Head is functioning properly, reassemble the injector
head following the procedure on page 20 - 14.

20 - 34

Disassembly and Reassembly

Injector Head - Turret Limit Switch


This procedure applies to Mark V H5S and H5SU Injector Head only.
Replacement Part Numbers:
Turret Limit Switch:

445-0004-100

Tools Required:
Medium-blade screwdriver

Turret Limit Switch


Removal

Needle-nose pliers

Small-blade screwdriver

Wire cutters

5/32 (4 mm) hex wrench

Cable ties

Soldering iron and solder

File

Loctite 242 or equivalent

1. Place the injector head on a padded surface. Disassemble the injector head then remove the pivot knuckle and plate with a 5/32 (4 mm)
hex wrench.
2. Manually move the Mechanical Stop plate to the full reverse position.
3. Remove the two screws and lockwashers securing the limit switch.
4. Remove the wires from the limit switch. If necessary, remove cable
ties to ease access.

Turret Limit Switch


Replacement

1. Before installing the limit switch, file the corner as depicted below:

Original

Modified

Figure 20.9: Turret Limit Switch Modification


2. Solder the white/black wires to the common and normally closed terminals of the replacement limit switch. (There is no polarity, therefore, wires can be attached to either terminal.)
3. Install the switch with the two screws and lockwashers removed previously. Route wires away from moving parts, and retain with cable
ties as needed.
4. Rotate the turret to check switch operation. The switch should click
before the turret is in the vertical position, and click again as the turret is moved out of the vertical position. (It may be necessary to bend
the actuator slightly in order to ensure proper operation.)
4. Install the pivot knuckle using Loctite 242 (or equivalent) on the
screws.
5. Reassemble the injector head. (See the procedure on page 20 - 14.)
20 - 35

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Injector Head - Mechanical Stop Limit Switch


Replacement Part Numbers:
Mechanical Stop Limit Switch:

78101-04-SK-07

Tools Required:
Medium-blade screwdriver
Small-blade screwdriver
Soldering iron and solder

Needle-nose pliers
Wire cutters
Cable ties

Mechanical Stop
Limit Switch
Removal

1. Disassemble the injector head.

Mechanical Stop
Limit Switch
Replacement

1. Assemble the replacement limit switch with bracket and solder wires
as shown below:

2. Desolder the wires from the limit switch.


3. Remove the limit switch and bracket from the injector head.

2. Install replacement switch with switch plunger positioned over the


center of the acme screw ball. Push the switch plunger into the acme
screw ball until the switch contacts close (a clicking sound can be
heard on switch closure). Secure with the two mounting screws previously removed.
3. Install cable ties as required to keep limit switch wires away from
moving parts.
4. Apply power to the system. Install turret (if applicable) and activate
forward load. If there is no forward movement, repeat step 2 above.
Readjustment of the bracket/switch position may be required.
5. Reverse piston to the rear limit. Enter the following parameters:
5.0ml/sec., 10 ml volume, and 100 psi. Arm the injector. After the
mechanical stop plate is in position, disable the mechanical stop
motor by disconnecting one of the motor leads. Disarm the injector.
Activate forward load until the piston plate makes contact with the
mechanical stop plate. When the unit begins beeping, activate
reverse load to the rearward limit. Reconnect the lead removed from
the mechanical stop motor, allowing stop to return to standby position
at 0 ml. Apply Loctite 242 (or equivalent) to limit switch bracket to
secure switch.
5. Reassemble the injector head. (See the procedure on page 20 - 14.)
20 - 36

Disassembly and Reassembly

Injector Head - Cable (Mark V Injector Heads)


Replacement Part Numbers:
Head Cable for H5S or H5SU:
Head Cable Removal

KSP-543

1. After disassembly of the injector head, note the routing of the cable
wires, then remove any cable ties securing the main cable to the
cable bracket or any other parts of the injector head.
2. Remove the clamp securing the main cable to the bracket, and set
aside until installing the replacement cable.
3. Carefully remove the motor leads (two on each terminal).
4. With a medium-blade screwdriver, remove the screw securing the
ground ring terminal to the back casting.
5. Locate the main cable connectors. Slide the locking retainer that
secures the two halves of the connector upward, then pull the connectors apart. Remove the screw from the cable bracket and remove
the stand-off.
6. Carefully lift the cable from the injector head to avoid disturbing other
wiring.

Head Cable
Replacement

1. Position the replacement cable in the injector head. Route the four
wires with push-on connectors (two wires in each connector) to the
motor. Refer to Page 20 - 24 for proper connections.
2. Join the connectors on the main cable to the mating connector on
the injector head wiring harness. Slide the locking retainer downward
to lock the connectors together. Reinstall the stand-off and cable
bracket with the screw previously removed.
3. Place the cable on the bracket, then replace and tighten the clamp.
4. Secure the ground wires with the mounting screw previously
removed.
5. As necessary to prevent interference with any moving parts, install
cable ties securing the cable and other wires to the bracket.
6. Apply power, then check injector head operation.
7. Reassemble the injector head. (See the procedure on page 20 - 14.)

20 - 37

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Injector Head - Cable (Mark V Plus Injector Heads)


Replacement Part Numbers:
Shielded Head Cable for H5P or H5M:
Head Cable Removal

KSP-743

1. After disassembly of the injector head, note the routing of the cable
wires, then remove any cable ties securing the main cable to the
cable bracket or any other parts of the injector head.
2. Remove the clamp securing the main cable to the bracket, and set
aside until installing the replacement cable.
3. Carefully remove the motor leads (two on each terminal).
4. With a medium-blade screwdriver, remove the screw securing the
ground ring terminal to the back casting.
5. Disconnect the connectors from the head card at P/J55 and P/J27.
6. (Timed Enable Card equipped heads only) Disconnect the connectors from the TEC Card at P/J71-73, then disconnect the LED by
removing Pins 9 (black) and 10 (red) from P71.
7. Carefully lift the cable from the injector head to avoid disturbing other
wiring.

Head Cable
Replacement

1. Position the replacement cable in the injector head. Route the four
wires with push-on connectors (two wires in each connector) to the
motor. Refer to Page 20 - 24 for proper connections.
2. Connect the head card connectors at P/J55 and P/J27.
3a. (Timed Enable Card equipped heads only) Remove the jumper
header between P72 and P73. Connect P72 (front) and P73 (rear) to
the TEC Card with THIS SIDE OUT facing away from the card.
Install the BLACK LED wire in Pin 9 and the RED LED wire in Pin 10
of P71.
3b. (For heads without Timed Enable) Leave the jumper header in position between P72 and P73, and leave P71 disconnected.
4. Position the cable on the bracket, then replace and tighten the clamp.
5. Secure the ground wires with the mounting screw previously
removed.
6. As necessary to prevent interference with any moving parts, install
cable ties securing the cable and other wires to the bracket.
7. Apply power, then check injector head operation.
8. Reassemble the injector head. (See the procedure on page 20 - 14.)

20 - 38

Disassembly and Reassembly

Injector Head - Oil Seal


Tools Required:
Medium blade screwdriver

Small blade screwdriver or scribe

Super Lube grease (or equivalent)

Front Plates

Type 1

Type 2

Type 3

Seal Type

Type 4

Figure 20.10: Front Plate Types


Oil Seal Removal

NOTE: Type 1 Front plates should be returned to Medrad for


replacement
1. Order the appropriate seal for the head to be repaired. If the seal
that you receive does not appear to be correct (see the diagram
above), return the seal to Medrad for replacement.
2. With type 2 heads (see above), unscrew the seal from the front
casting. On type 3 and H5P heads, remove the plastic plugs from
the seal by pushing the edge of the plug with a screwdriver.
Remove the screws securing the seal, then remove the seal.
3. Remove the O-ring from the inside of the groove (see figure on
page 20 - 40).

20 - 39

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Injector Head - Oil Seal (continued)

INSERT O-RING
INTO GROOVE

Type 3
seal
pictured

PLASTIC CAPS

Oil Seal Replacement

Figure 20.11: O-Ring Installation


1. Remove any contrast that may be on the plunger shaft.
2. Lightly lubricate the new O-ring with grease, then insert into
groove.
3. Type 2 heads:

Thread cartridge seal into front casting.

Type 3 or H5P heads:


A.
B.
C.
D.

Install seal cartridge.


Lightly lubricate the seal cartridge screws.
Install and tighten screws to secure the seal cartridge.
Install the plastic plugs over the mounting screws with the
rounded boss facing the screws. Use a flat object, such as
a coin or the side of a screwdriver, for easier installation.

4. Rotate the piston rotation lever in both directions to ensure unrestricted movement.
5. Install the turret on the head with a pressure jacket and syringe.
6. Apply power to the injector, then verify proper syringe operation
with the newly installed seal cartridge.

20 - 40

Disassembly and Reassembly

Injector Head - Pivot Knuckle Adjustment


This procedure is to be performed if the injector head will not stay in
the position in which it was set.
Tools Required:
1/2 Socket (13mm)
Adjustment
Procedure

1. Remove the hole plug located on the side of the pivot knuckle.
2. Tighten the nut until the head will remain in the set position.
NOTE: If the pivot knuckle is secured by a bolt, avoid overtightening of the bolt to prevent stripping of the casting.
Stripping will result in slippage of the bolt, causing the
injector head to fall.

20 - 41

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Power Switch
Tools Required:
Medium blade screwdriver

Power Switch
Removal

Pliers

1. Remove the injector from the power source.


2. Remove the power switch by prying gently with a screwdriver.
3. Disconnect the wires from the switch.

Power Switch
Replacement

Connect the power switch wires as shown below. For installation in


CRC units, orient the switch with the two pins facing upward. On an
Arrow switch, pin 13 will face upward; on an Oslo switch, pin 5 will
face upward. If the switch has only four contacts, do not connect
the blue jumper. For installation in Multinational Pedestal units, orient the switch with the pins on the right when facing the mounting
plate. On an Arrow switch, pins 12 and 25 will be on the right; on an
Oslo switch, pins 1A and 4B will be on the right.

Figure 20.12: Power Switch Terminal Orientations


NOTE: If pedestal unit is equipped with connector plate circuit
breakers, use -I pedestal wiring configuration.

2. Place the switch in the unit without inserting fully. Connect the
injector to a power source, then apply power.
3. If the switch is oriented correctly, the On/Off label will agree with
the position of the switch. If this is not the case, remove and
reverse the switch. When oriented correctly, fully insert the switch
into the case.

20 - 42

Disassembly and Reassembly

Line Voltage Conversion


Adapting the Mark V / Mark V+ for different line voltage affects three
items: Wiring to the power transformer; The line fuse located beside
the power transformer; The power switch. All three components must
match the line voltage supplied.
Adapting the Mark V Plus Multinational (190-250V) effects the wiring
to the transformer only.
WARNING: Hazardous voltages exist within the Mark V
and Mark V Plus Injection systems. To avoid injury,
remove the injector from the power source before attempting any line voltage conversion, and remove the line cord
from the power source.
Tools Required
Small-blade screwdriver (for pedestal systems)

Medium-blade screwdriver (for control room consoles)

Pin extractor for wiring harness connector

1. Pedestal Systems: Disconnect the cables from the connector


plate. Remove the two screws which mount column door, then
open the door. Remove the power chassis.

Conversion
Procedure:

Control Room Consoles: Remove the two screws from the top
edge of the Control Panel, then tilt the Control Panel downward.
2. In non -I Pedestal Systems, change the line fuse and power switch
to comply with line voltage, according to the chart below. In non -I
Pedestal Systems, the line fuse is located next to the power transformer in the bottom of the column. In Control Room Consoles,
there are two line fuses (F1 and F2) located on the left side, below
the circuit cards.

Pedestal

Voltage
Range
95-105
106-120
121-125
190-210
211-239
240-250

Line
Voltage
100 VAC
110 VAC
125 VAC
200 VAC
230 VAC
250 VAC

Fuse
Value
10 A 3AB
10 A 3AB
10 A 3AB
5 A 3AB *
5 A 3AB *
5 A 3AB *

Fuse
476-4010-250
476-4010-250
476-4010-250
476-7005-250
476-7005-250
476-7005-250

Power
Breaker *
Switch
475-4106-010
3000331
475-4106-010
3000331
475-4106-010
3000331
475-4106-005 455-2600-015
475-4106-005 455-2600-015
475-4106-005 455-2600-015

Multinational and some domestic pedestal units utilize circuit breakers, mounted on the rear connector plate. Check
your system to verify which replacement part is required
before ordering.
20 - 43

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Line Voltage Conversion - (continued)


CRC (Rack)

Voltage
Range
95-105
106-120
121-125
190-210
211-239
240-250

Line
Voltage
100 VAC
110 VAC
125 VAC
200 VAC
230 VAC
250 VAC

Fuse
Value
10 A 3AB
10 A 3AB
10 A 3AB
5 A 3AB *
5 A 3AB *
5 A 3AB *

Fuse
476-4010-250
476-4010-250
476-4010-250
476-7005-250
476-7005-250
476-7005-250

Power
Breaker *
Switch
475-4106-010
3000331
475-4106-010
3000331
475-4106-010
3000331
475-4106-005 455-2600-015
475-4106-005 455-2600-015
475-4106-005 455-2600-015

Multinational and some domestic CRC units utilize circuit


breakers. Check your system to verify which replacement
part is required before ordering.

If the unit is a -I unit, skip to step 4.


3a. Locate and disconnect the connectors on the wires leading to and
from the power transformer.
3b. Pins 1 through 8 of the harness connector determine the line voltage configuration. To change the configuration, refer to this chart
for the harness wiring; do not change the connector wired to the
transformer:

Pedestal

CRC (Rack)

Line
Voltage

Neutral
(blue)

Hot
(brown)

Jumper
(white/brown)

100 VAC
110 VAC
125 VAC
200 VAC
230 VAC
250 VAC

1 and 5
1 and 5
1 and 5
1 (only)
1 (only)
1 (only)

2 and 6
3 and 7
4 and 8
6 (only)
7 (only)
8 (only)

n/a
n/a
n/a
2 to 5
3 to 5
4 to 5

Line
Voltage

Neutral
(blue)

Hot
(brown)

Jumper
(white/brown)

100 VAC
110 VAC
125 VAC
200 VAC
230 VAC
250 VAC

1 and 6
1 and 6
1 and 6
1 (only)
1 (only)
1 (only)

2 and 7
3 and 8
4 and 9
7 (only)
8 (only)
9 (only)

n/a
n/a
n/a
2 to 6
3 to 6
4 to 6

3c. Skip to step 5 on the following page.

20 - 44

Disassembly and Reassembly

Line Voltage Conversion - (continued)


4. -I units only
4a. Remove the bottom cover of the Control Unit.
4b. Locate the power transformer. When changing the configuration,
refer to the following table for wiring guidelines. Do not change the
wires on the X side.
Line
Voltage

Hot
(brown)

Neutral
(blue)

Jumper
(brown)

100 VAC
110 VAC
125 VAC
200 VAC
230 VAC
250 VAC

H2 and H6
H3 and H7
H4 and H8
H6 (only)
H7 (only)
H8 (only)

H1 and H5
H1 and H5
H1 and H5
H1 (only)
H1 (only)
H1 (only)

n/a
n/a
n/a
H2 to H5
H3 to H5
H4 to H5

4c. Replace the bottom cover of the Control Unit.


5. Mate the harness connectors together.
6. (Pedestal Systems only): Install the power chassis.
7. Connect the injector head to the rear connector panel.
7. Apply power to the injector, then confirm proper unit operation.
8. (Pedestal Systems only): Close and secure the column door with
the two screws previously removed.
9. (Control Room Consoles only): Close the Control Panel, then
secure with the two screws previously removed.

20 - 45

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Line Frequency Conversion


The Power Drive Circuit in the Mark V / Mark V+ is sensitive to line frequency. When manufactured, the injector is calibrated for either 50 or
60 Hz; marked on a tag on the Power Drive Card, and the system
serial number tag on the Control Unit. If the injector is to be used at a
line frequency other than as marked, adjustment can be made for
proper operation through the following instructions.
Tools Required:
Small-blade screwdriver (for pedestal systems)

Conversion
Procedure

Medium-blade screwdriver or Hex-pack (for Control Room


Consoles)

37-pin card extender

Oscilloscope

Alignment tool (or small screwdriver)

Jumper wire

NOTE: Disregard any messages that may appear in the


SENTINEL throughout this adjustment process.
1. Remove power from the injector, then disconnect from the power
source.
2. (Pedestal Systems only): Disconnect the cables from the connector plate to avoid interference with the column door.
3. If the unit is equipped with the ISI 100 Card (included in the ECG/
Scope option), disassemble the Control Unit (see page 20-1), then
remove the ISI Card. Position the 50/60 Hz switch on the ISI Card
at the line frequency supplied to the injector. Reinstall the ISI
Card.
4. (Pedestal Systems only): Reassemble the Control Unit. Remove
the two screws securing the column door, then open the door.

(Control Room Consoles only): Leave the control unit open.


5. Remove the Power Drive Card, then install the card extender in
between the Power Drive Card, and its mating connector in the
chassis. Reconnect the cables on the connector plate.
6. Disconnect the white/red AC wires from the SCR bridge. (The
bridge is located on the Power Chassis, or the Power Drive Relay
Card.) Tape or otherwise insulate these wires to avoid an accident.
7. Apply power to the injector.

20 - 46

Disassembly and Reassembly

Line Frequency Conversion - (continued)


If the unit is equipped with a PDCP, skip to step 12b.
8. Set the Oscilloscope as follows:

vertical 10 mV/div, horizontal 0.2 mS/div, trigger on line, +


slope, DC.

Set the vertical position to mid-screen.

Ground the Scope to pin 28, 29, or 30 of the Power Drive


Card connector. Monitor U1 pin 7.

9. Apply power to the injector, then adjust the Scope until zero crossing occurs at the center of the scope.
10. Connect a jumper wire from U2 pin 12, to card connector pin 14
(+15 VDC).
11. Change the vertical sensitivity of the Scope to 5 v/div. Monitor the
anode of D18. Adjust R6 until the negative transition of the pulse
occurs 0.4 msec (2 divisions on the Scope) to the left of the centerline of the scope.
12a. (PDC only):
Remove the jumper from U2. Change the vertical deflection of the
Scope to 0.5 v/div, then monitor the junction of R20 and R21.
Adjust R81 for 2.0 VDC integration.
12b. (PDCP/PDCI only):
Set the vertical deflection of the Scope to .5v/div, then monitor J1,
pin 4. Adjust R112 for 2.0 V integration.
13a. (PDC only):
Change the horizontal sweep of the Scope to 10 mS/div, then
monitor the anode of D17. Rotate R19 (20-turn pot) clockwise until
pulses appear, then rotate R19 counterclockwise until the pulses
disappear. Continue rotating R19 an additional quarter turn (counterclockwise) after the pulses disappear.
13b. (PDCP/PDCI only):
Set the horizontal sweep of the Scope to 10ms/div, then monitor
J1, pin 8. Rotate R90 (20-turn pot) clockwise until pulses appear,
then rotate R90 counterclockwise until the pulses disappear. Continue rotating R90 an additional quarter turn (counterclockwise)
after the pulses disappear.

20 - 47

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems

Line Frequency Checkout


Perform this checkout procedure after adjusting the line frequency
according to the procedure on page 20 - 46
.
1. Remove power from the injector. Remove the card extender, then
insert the Power Drive Card directly into the chassis, and reconnect the AC wires to the SCR bridge. Connect the injector head,
then apply power to the injector.
2. Reverse the plunger completely. Activate forward load. The
plunger should reach the 0 ml mark +1 ml, within 15-30 seconds
(H5S/H5SU) or 8-30 seconds (H5P/H5M).
3. Reverse the plunger completely. Set up an injection of 1 ml/sec for
150 ml. Arm and inject. The injection should be smooth, with no
interruptions or error messages.
4. Reverse the plunger completely. Set up an injection of 50 ml/sec
for 150 ml. Arm and inject. The injection should be smooth, with
no interruptions or error messages.
5. (Pedestal Systems only) Remove cables from the connector plate.
Close the column door, then secure by tightening the two captive
screws. Reconnect the cables to the connector plate.
6. (Control Room Consoles) Tilt the Control Panel upward, then
secure by tightening the two captive screws.

20 - 48

Service Part Kits

21
Injector Head Parts

Service Part Kits


Turret Pin for Mark V Injector Head
KSP-105
60/150 ml Turret Assembly
KMA-615
150 ml Turret Assembly (tan)
KMA-150 *
200 ml Turret Assembly (tan)
KMA-200 *
150 ml Turret Assembly (blue)
KMA-150P
200 ml Turret Assembly (blue)
KMA-200P
Pressure Jacket Screws (4 each)
KSP-504
Hex Spring 150 ml Pressure Jacket (6 each)
KSP-507
Hex Spring 200 ml Pressure Jacket (6 each)
KSP-508
Syringe Heater
KSP-509
Plunger Indicator Feedback Pot
KSP-513
Mechanical Stop Indicator Feedback Pot
KSP-514
Plunger Release Knob (with screw cap)
for Injector Head serial numbers 5343 and below KSP-560 *
Plunger Release Knob (with screw cap)
for Injector Head serial numbers 5344 and above KSP-760
Motor Knob Assembly (with screw cap)
KSP-561
Mechanical Stop Motor-Drive Belt
KSP-562
Plunger Motor-Drive Belt
KSP-563
Top Scale Overlay (with fwd/rev switch assembly)
KSP-564 *
Pressure Jacket Positioning Spring Assy.
(kit of 2 with screws)
KSP-574
Mechanical Stop Motor
KSP-580
Plunger Motor (complete with gear assy.)
KSP-581
Hex Spring for 60 ml Pressure Jacket
KSP-708
Plastic Plunger Release Knob Assy. (with screw cap) KSP-760
Injector Head Cable (with connectors)
KSP-543 *
Injector Head Cable
KSP-743-2
Top and Bottom Head Covers with Hardware
KSP-546 *
Top and Bottom Covers with Hardware
(For non-shielded Injector Heads)
KSP-746
Top and Bottom Covers with Hardware
(For shielded Injector Heads)
KSP-746-2
Mechanical Stop Limit Switch Kit
78101-04-SK-07

* Items specific to Mark V H5S Heads


21 - 1

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


Injector Head Parts
(cont.)

Top Overlay (For H5P Heads.)


(with fwd/rev switch assembly)
Top Overlay (For H5M Heads.)
(with fwd/rev switch assembly)
Light bulbs for Armed Indicator on Head
Lens for Armed Indicator on Head
Replacement Oil Seal Cartridge

(English)
(German)
(English)
(German)

Console Parts

Card Extenders
Complete Set of Mark V / Mark V+ Card Extenders for
SYS 500 or SYS 500P Pedestal Injectors (kit includes
1 each of all necessary card extenders for servicing) KSP-536
Complete set of Mark V / Mark V+ Card Extenders for
Control Room Console Injectors (kit includes 1 each
of all necessary card extenders for servicing)
KSP-636
Fuses
Fuse Kit for 100-125 VAC Units (all types)
Fuse Kit for 200-250 VAC Units (all types)

KSP-568
KSP-569

Batteries
Replacement Battery for 20000 Series PPI Card (kit of 1)

KSP-572

Relays
Film Changer Relay

KSP-527

Lamps
#385 Long Life Light Bulbs for Armed indicators (kit of 5)

KSP-573

Console Parts
Set of Replacement Casters (2 Locking 2 Non-Locking)
Replacement Handswitch Housing
Film Changer Cord Reel with A4M Connector
(4 conductor)
Start Switch Cord Reel with Start Button and Housing
(2 conductor)
Amp Pin Extraction Tool
Switches
Power Switch Assembly for 100-125 VAC System
Power Switch Assembly for 200-250 VAC System

21 - 2

KSP-764
KSP-764-2
KSP-964
KSP-964-2
KSP-703
KSP-725
KSP-797

KSP-519
KSP-550
KSP-521
KSP-522
KSP-597

KSP-523
KSP-524

Service Part Kits


Cables

Connectors (Mark V Plus)


Panel Mount Injector Head Female Connector (with pins)
Injector Head Male Connector Assembly for use with
Injector Head Extension Cables (with pins)
Injector Head Female Connector Assembly for use with
Injector Head Extension Cables (with pins)
Connectors (Mark V)
Panel Mount Injector Head Female Connector (with pins)
Injector Head Male Connector Assembly for use with
Injector Head Extension Cables (with pins)
Injector Head Female Connector Assembly for use with
Injector Head Extension Cables (with pins)
ECG Cables
ECG Starter Kit (includes patient cable, electrode wires,
and electrodes)
ECG Patient Cable only
ECG Electrode Wires (kit of 3)
ECG Electrode Pads only (box of 10)
System Cables
A4F Connector (mates with Film Changer
Cord Reel - 2 each)
Extension for Film Changer Cord Reel
(10 ft. [3.05 m], 4 conductor)
Extension for Film Changer Cord Reel
(25 ft. [7.6 m], 4 conductor)
Replacement Power Cord for 100-125 VAC System
Replacement Power Cord for 220-250 VAC System

KSP-765
KSP-766
KSP-767

KSP-565
KSP-566
KSP-567

EMA-223
EMA-224
EMA-225
EMA-227

KSP-128
KSP-129
RMC-100
KSP-530
KSP-531

21 - 3

Mark V and Mark V Plus Injection Systems


Miscellaneous

21 - 4

Calibration Equipment
Pressure Gauge Assembly (with instructions for
Calibrating Injector Pressure constants)
Portable Digital Timer (with Instructions for
Checking Injector Calibration)

KSP-135
KSP-141

Manuals
Mark V Plus Operation Manual
Mark V Operation Manual

KMP 900E
KMP 805P

Mark V / Mark V Plus Service Manual (English)


Mark V / Mark V Plus Service Schematic Manual

KMP 826
KMP 826-S